Sei sulla pagina 1di 377

Solluciones a Sistem

mas Electtrnicos Automotr


A
rices

ENTR
RENAMI
MIENTO
O TECN
NICO
LECT
TURA DE
D MEM
MORIAS
S AUTO
OMOTR
RICES

mexico 22008

LICZNIK LIST

LICZNIK LIST
ALFA ROMEO
- 146 HC05
- 147 93c86
- 147 ST6249
- 156 HC11KG4 White
- 156 HC11KG4 Black
- 164 HC05
- 166 93c56
- 166 HC711
AUDI
- TT HC912
- 100 93c46 VDO
- A3 HC912 01
- A3 HC912 03
- A3 03 93c86
- A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v1
- A3/A4/A6 93c66 VDO v2
- A4 24c08 BOSCH
- A4 93c46 VDO
- A4 93c56
- A4 93c56 UKNSI 95
- A4 93c56 UKNSI 97
- A4 93c56 UKNSI 98
- A4 93c56 z komp VDO
- A4 HC912
- A6 93c46 VDO
- A6 93c56 UKNSI 97
- A6 93c86 VDO
- A8 93c56 VDO 95
- A8 93c86 VDO 01
- A8 03 93c86
BMW
- BMW
- BMW
- BMW
- BMW

3
3
5
5

E36 91-98
2 Memory
Blue
Green IIC

CHRYSLER
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (1 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

- PT Cruser HC912
CITROEN
- Berlingo HC08
- C2 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 )
- C3 Dash + BSI ( 93c46 + 95160 )
- C5 Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + 68HC912 )
- Evasion HC05H12
- Jumper 95040
- Jumpi HC08
- Xantia 93c46
- Xara 03 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 )
- Xara 93c46
- Xara Picasso 2003
- Xara Picasso 93c66
- Xara Picasso v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 95160 )
- Xara Picasso v2 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + uPD780949 )
DACIA
- Logan Sagem 93c56
DAEWOO
- Kalos HC05H12
- Matiz HC05H12
FIAT
- Brava 93c56 YazMeter
- Brava HC(7)05
- Brava HC05E6
- Brava HC08
- Brava HC11KG4
- Brava ST6249
- Doblo 95040
- Ducato 25040
- Marea HC08
- Multipla 93c56 v1
- Multipla 93c56 v2
- Palio 95040
- Panda 95040
- Punto2 25040
- Punto2 25020
- Punto2 HC08 z obr.
- Punto2 HC08 bez obr.
- Punto3 95040
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (2 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Scudo HC08
Scudo 95040
Seicento 25020
Seicento 25040
Stilo HC912D60
Tempra 93c46 v1
Tempra 93c46 v2
Tempra 93c06
Tipo Veglia 93c46
Tipo Borg 93c46
Tempra Borg 93c46

FORD
- Escort HC11
- Fiesta HC11
- Fiesta NEC uPD780973
- Focus HC11
- Galaxy HC11
- Puma HC11
- Scorpio HC11
- WinStar HC11
- Ecoline 9S12DT256C
- Escape 9S12H128
- Expedition 68HC912D60
- Explorer 68HC912DG128
- Explorer 68HC912D60
- Explorer 9S12DP256
- Fiesta 24c08
- Focus 24c16
- Focus 9S12H128
- Focus 06 24c16
- Focus C-Max 3M5T 9S12H256
- Focus C-Max 4M5T 9S12H256
- Fusion 24c08
- Fusion 06 93c66
- Galaxy VDO v1 93c86
- Galaxy VDO v2 93c86
- Mondeo 68HC912D60
- Transit 24c16
- Transit Kiencle 93c66
- Transit Kiencle 93c66 CRC
HONDA
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (3 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Accord 93c56
Civic 01 93c56
HRV 93c46
Jazz 93c56
Legend 93c46
Shuttle 93c46

HYUNDAI
- Matrix 93c46
- Santa Fe 93c46
- Hyundai NEC PD780828
IVECO
- Iveco 93s56
KIA
- Carnival 93c46
- Clarus 93c46
- Rio 93c46
- Sorento 93c46
- Sportage 93c46
LANCIA
- K Veglia Borletti HC11KG4
- K Veglia Borletti TMS370
- Libra Jaeger HC11KG4
MAZDA
- 121 Visteon HC11E20
- 323/626 v1 93c56
- 323/626 v2 93c56
- 323/626 v1 93c46
- 323/626 v2 93c46
- Premacy 93c56
- 626 01 93c56
- MPV 93c46
MITSUBISHI
- Carisma 93c46
- Colt 93c46
- Lancer 98 93c46
- Pajero 93c46
- SpaceStar 93c46
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (4 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Galant 93c46
Outlander 03 93cs56
Pajero 93c56
Space Wagon 93c46
Shogun 93c46

MERCEDES
- A Class 98 HC11KG4
- A Class 00 HC912
- A Class Dash + BCU ( 93c66 + 68HC05 )
- Actros tacho
- C Class 93c56
- C Class 95 93c56
- E Class 00 93c86
- E Class 93c56
- Motometer
- SLK/CLK 93c56
- Smart VDO 93c66
- Sprinter Kienzle 24c02
- Sprinter 24c02
- Sprinter 93s46
- VDO 93c56/93c66
- Vito CDI Jaeger
- Vito CDI tacho
- Vito 04 ST95080
- Vito tacho
- Vito 05 ST95080
NISSAN
- Primera 93c46
- Micra 93c46
- Micra 93c66
OPEL
- Astra H M35080
- Astra VDO 93c56
- Astra TRW
- Frontera DELCO Atmel 752
- Vectra B 93c46
- Vectra C 93c66
- Astra VDO 93c46
- Omega 93c46
- Senator 93c46
- Signum 93c66
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (5 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Montery 99 93c46
Opel NEC PD780828
Zafira TRW 24c02
Zafira VDO 93c56

PEUGEOT
- 206 Jaeger 2002
- 206 Jaeger HC05H12
- 206 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 )
- 306 Sagem v1 93c56
- 306 Sagem v2 93c56
- 406 BSI v1 93c66
- 406 BSI v2 93c66
- 406 v1 Dash + BSI ( 93c66 + 93c66 )
- 406 Jaeger HC05
- 406 Sagem 93c46
- 607 VDO
- 806 Jaeger HC05H12
- Expert Jaeger HC08
- Partner Jaeger 2003
- Partner Jaeger HC08
- Partner 03 Dash + BSI ( 95020 + 95160 )
- Partner Dash + BSI ( 68HC08 + PD780949 )
RENAULT
- Clio III Sagem 25020
- Clio Jaeger HC08
- Clio Sagem 93c46
- Clio 04 93c56
- Espace Jaeger TMS370
- Espace 2002
- Espace 2003 93c56
- Kangoo Jaeger HC08
- Kangoo Sagem 93c46
- Laguna Jaeger TMS370
- Laguna Sagem v1 93c46
- Laguna Jaeger HC08
- Laguna Jaeger HC12
- Master 2004 93c66
- Megane Jaeger HC08AB32
- Megane Jaeger HC11KG4
- Megane Sagem 93c46
- Megane Visteon 93c56
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (6 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Safrane v1 93c46
Safrane v2 93c46
Safrane v3 93c56
Scenic 00 HC08
Scenic 04 93c56
Trafic 01 95020
Renault v1 NEC PD780973
Renault v2 NEC PD780973

SEAT
- Alhambra HC11
- Aroza 24c02
- Cordoba 00 93c66
- Cordoba 93c46
- Ibiza VDO
- Ibiza VDO 03 93c86
- Ibiza VDO 93c66
- Inka 93c66
- Leon 93c66
- Leon v1 93c86
- Leon v2 93c86
- Leon v3 93c86
- Toledo VDO 01 93c86
- Toledo VDO 24c16
SKODA
- Fabia VDO 93c86
- Fabia VDO 03 93c86
- Felicia 93c66
- Octavia 00 93c86
- Octavia 01 93c86
- Octavia 02 93c86
- Octavia v1 93c66
- Octavia v2 93c66
- Octavia2 24c16
- Octavia2 24c32
SUZUKI
- Swift VDO 05 93c66
- Liana 04 93c56
TOYOTA
- Allion 93c46
- Alteza 93c46
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (7 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Ardeo Denso 93c46


Aristo Denso 93c46
Avalon Denso 98 93c46
Avalon VDO 93c56
Avensis Denso 93c46
Avensis Yazaki 93c46
Avensis VDO 93c56
Camry 96-03 93c46
Camry Denso 05 93c56
Camry Yazaki 93c46
Carina Yazaki 93c46
Caldina Yazaki 93c46
Celica Denso 00-02 93c46
Chaser Denso 93c46
Corolla Denso 93c46
Corolla Sagem 93c46
Corolla VDO 93s56
Corolla VDO 93c56
Corona Yazaki 93c46
Cressida 97-99 93c46
Crown Denso 93c46
Duet Denso 93c46
Echo Denso 93c46
Estima 96 93c46
Fielder Denso 93c46
Ipsum 96 93c46
Forerunner Yazaki 93c56
Forerunner v1 93c66
Forerunner v2 93c66
Fucargo 99-01 93c46
HighLander 01 93c46
Harrier Denso 93c46
HDJ100 Yazaki 93c56
Hiace Yazaki 93c46
Kluger Denso 93c56
LandCruiser 90 93c56
LandCruiser 100 93c56
Prada/Prado 93c56
Prada/Prado 93c66
RAV 4 96-01 93c46
Yaris 93c46

VOLVO
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (8 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

850 v1 93c46
850 v2 93c46
850 93c56
S40 93c56
S70 97 93c56
S60 01 HC12
S70 00 HC908
S70 00 HC12
S70 01 HC12
S80 00 HC908
S80 01 HC12
V40 93c56 UKNSI

VW
- Bora VDO 93c86
- Caddy VDO 24c16
- Caddy VDO 24c32
- Corrado Motometer 93c56
- Corrado VDO 93c56
- Golf 3 Diesel 93c46
- Golf 3 Motometer v1 93c56
- Golf 3 Motometer v2 93c56
- Golf 3 TRW 93c46
- Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v1
- Golf 3 VDO 93c46 v2
- Golf 4 Motometer 24c02
- Golf 4 VDO 00 93c86
- Golf 4 VDO 01 93c86
- Golf 4 VDO 93c46
- Golf 4 VDO 93c66
- Golf 5 24c16
- Golf 5 24c32
- Lupo 24c02
- LT35 24c02 tacho
- LT35 93s46
- Passat B5 VDO v1 93c66
- Passat B5 VDO v2 93c66
- Passat 95 93c56
- Passat B6 VDO v1 93c86
- Passat B6 VDO v2 93c86
- Passat B6 VDO v3 93c86
- Passat GT 93c46
- Passat GT 93c56
http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (9 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

LICZNIK LIST

Passat Jaeger v1 68HC711KG2


Passat Jaeger v2 68HC711KG2
Passat Motometer 24c08
Passat Motometer 93c56
Passat Motometer 96 93c56
Passat VD202 93c46
Passat VDO 91 93c56
Passat B7 24c32
Polo Motometer 24c02
Polo Motometer 93c46
Polo VDO 01 93c86
Polo VDO 02 93c86
Polo VDO 96-98 93c46
Sharan 68HC11E9
Sharan VDO v1 93c86
Sharan VDO v2 93c86
Sharan VDO v3 93c86
Touran VDO v1 24c16
Touran VDO v2 24c16
Touran VDO 24c32
T4 Motometer 93c56
T4 VDO 93c66
T5 VDO 03 93c86
T5 VDO v1 93c86
T5 VDO v2 93c86
Tuareg 24c08
Tuareg 93c46
Vento TRW 93c46
Vento VDO 93c46
Motometer 24c02 #10
Motometer 24c02 #20
Motometer 24c02 #30
Motometer 24c02 #40
Motometer 24c02 #50
Motometer 24c02 #60
Polo Motometer 02 24c02
Phaeton v1 24c08
Phaeton v2 24c08

http://www.decoding-service.sk/licznik_list.htm (10 of 10) [04/12/2007 22:08:12]

IMMO KILLER

IMMO KILLER - podporovan jednotky


Alfa Romeo 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04
Audi A3,A4,A6 Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)
BMW Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli
Citroen Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC
Citroen C3- BSI - MEM 95160
Citroen Xara - BSI - MEM 95040
Citroen Xara Picasso - BSI - MEM 95040
Citroen EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)
Citroen MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)
Citroen SID 803 PIN calculator (95320)
Citroen SID 803 PIN programmer (95320)
Daewoo Siemens TMS374
Fiat Bosch - 24C02
Fiat IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Mirelli
Fiat IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli
Fiat 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
Fiat BPKA DELCO HC11F1
Fiat Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11
Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9
Fiat IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9
Fiat IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1
Fiat IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
Fiat IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040
Fiat IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)
Fiat IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)
http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (1 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

IMMO KILLER

Fiat IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)


Fiat IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)
Fiat IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11F1
Fiat IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11
Fiat Lucas DCU3F 95080
Iveco Daily Bosch 24C16
Kia Siemens TMS374
Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ?
Mercedes C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2
Mercedes Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes Start Error - Sprinter
Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC05
Mercedes Start Error - Vito HC08
Mercedes Vito 24C04 - Unlock ECU
Opel Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)
Opel DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)
Opel DTL - Bosch
Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356
Opel 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)
Opel 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo)
Opel Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010
Opel Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)
Peugeot MP5.1.1 - Bosch
Peugeot S2000 - Sagem
Peugeot BSI - De/encryption
Peugeot ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.
Peugeot EDC 15 - 5P08C3 PIN prog.
Peugeot EDC 16 - 95160 PIN prog.
Peugeot EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)
Peugeot EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)
Peugeot 206 BSI - MCU HC912
Peugeot 206 BSI - MEM 95160
Peugeot 307 BSI - MCU HC912
Peugeot 307 BSI - MEM 95160
Peugeot 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
Peugeot ECU SAGEM S2000 PIN progr.
Peugeot IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374
Peugeot IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Peugeot IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Peugeot IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374
Peugeot IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (2 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

IMMO KILLER

Peugeot IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400


Peugeot IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCU
Peugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512
Peugeot Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
Polonez Delco HC11F1
Renault 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli
Renault DCI - Bosch
Renault DCI - Delphi
Renault DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo
Renault DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo
Renault SIRIUS32 - Siemens
Renault SIRIUS34 - Siemens
Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug)
Renault 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)
Renault Fenix 3 95160
Renault IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
Renault IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370
Renault IAW5NR2.C5 95160
Renault S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM
Renault Siemens TMS374
Renault Siemens TMS374
Renault Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)
Rover 214,216 93C46
Skoda SIMOS - Siemens
Toyota Land Cruiser 93LC66
Toyota YarisDenso 93C46
V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens
V.A.G IMMO 5WK4 678 - HC05 - Siemens
V.A.G IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo
V.A.G IMMO VW LT - HC05X16
V.A.G IMMO White box - 93C46 - f+g Megamos
V.A.G EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)
V.A.G. EDC16 Bosch 95320
V.A.G. TDI - Bosch
V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (1 plug) Bosch
V.A.G. TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch

http://www.decoding-service.sk/immo_killer.htm (3 of 3) [04/12/2007 22:08:47]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GTI-TDI Forum FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden


Tachonummern
Letzter Beitrag | Erster ungelesener Beitrag

Hallo Gast [Anmelden|Registrieren]

Druckvorschau | An Freund senden | Thema zu Favoriten hinzufgen

Tachonummern
Autor

firebird73
Mitglied
Dabei seit: 05.03.2006
Beitrge: 49
Herkunft: 1120 Wien /
sterreich

Vorheriges Thema | Nchstes Thema

Beitrag
Tachonummern

Vielleicht ist das ja fr euch von Interesse, hab ich im Internet gefunden.
AUDI
A3
8L0919860A - Audi A3 VDO with 93C66 EEPROM
8L0919860D - Audi A3 with 93C66 - VDO110.008.894/001
A4
AUDI A4 - 8D0919033A - UK NSI - 93C56 - sw B
AUDI A4 - 8D0919033P - VDO - 93C56
AUDI A4 - 8D0919860E - JAPAN with 93LC56
AUDI A4 - 8D0919861A - UK-NSI with 93LC56
AUDI A4 - 8D0919861C - 1998 - VDO 110.008.884/002 - AUZ7Z0
AUDI A4 - 8D0919910Q - 1999 - VDO - 93C66
AUDI A4 - 8D0920860E - VDO year 1997 with 93C66
AUDI A4 - 8D0920880E - B5-VDO year 1997 with 93C66
AUDI A4 - 8D0920900H - 1999/2000y. - VDO 110.008.938/006 - AUZ7Z0
AUDI A4 - 8D0920930 - 1999- dash Magneti Marelli with HC912
AUDI A4 - 8D0920931 - VDO
AUDI A4 - 8E0920900G - 2001
AUDI A4 - UK NSI new - 1996 - 93C56 - sw A
Audi A4 VDO
A6
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI

A6
A6
A6
A6
A6
A6

1995-2,8i - 93C46 - VDO


4A1919033HG - 1997- 93C46 - VDO
4B0919-900C,F,G,M,930A,K,931B,932K,L,Q - AUZ7Z0 with 93C86
4B0919860F - JAPAN with 93LC56
4B0919860L - UK-NSI with 93LC56 sw A
4B0919880G - AUW0 with 93C66

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (1 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

AUDI
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI
AUDI

A6
A6
A6
A6
A6

4B0919881A - AUX0 with 93C66-1999


4B0920900Q - HC912 -- MM4
8D0919033C - UK NSI - 93C56 - sw B
8D0919880M - 1998 - VDO (1,9TDi)
8D0920900M - HC912DG128

TT
AUDI TT - 8N1919880E - HC912
VW
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE
BEETLE

- dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 901C


- dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 920 901F
- dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912DG128 - 1C0 919 951L
- dash Magneti Marelli - MC912DG128 - 1C0 920 840A
1998 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 861A
2000 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 919 901X
2000 - dash Magneti Marelli - 68HC912D60 - 1C0 920 800A

BORA
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW

BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA
BORA

1J0919861F-MMO - Motometer 24C02


1J0920801E-A4V - 1999 - Motometer 93C86
1J0920801E-BOO - 24C02 - Motometer
1J0920805E-BOO - Motometer 24C02
1J0920806E - engine 1,9SDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO
1J0920806G - 24C08 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer
1J0920821B-B00 - Motometer 24C02 - 2000
1J0920821BX - year 2000 VDO
1J0920822B-BOO - Motometer 24C02
1J0920822C - 24C02 - 1,9TDi - 2000 - Motometer
1J0920826B - Motometer 24C08 - 1,9TDi ,2001y.
1J5920806C-A4V - Motometer 93C86
1J5920825C-A4V - Motometer 93C86
1J5920826A-A4V - Motometer 93C86
1J5920826C-A4V - Motometer 93C86
1J5920906K-A4V55 - VDO - 93C86

Caddy
CADDY - 1T0 920 861A - 24C32 - VDO - 2005
CADDY - 2K0 920 840E - 24C16 - VDO - 2004
CADDY - 2K0 920 841A - 24C32 - VDO - 2004
CORRADO
CORRADO - 535 919 033AP - 1993 - VDO - 93C46
CORRADO - 535 919 042AC - VDO - 93C46
CORRADO - Motometer 1993 - 93C56 (14pin)
GOLF

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (2 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF

III - 1H0919861E - TRW 93C46


III - 1H0919864Q - TRW 93C46
III - 1H0919860A year 96 TRW 93C46
III - 1H0919860H - CL-TDI- 94 TRW 93C46
III - 1H0919860T - 1,9TD 93C56 Motometer
III - 1H0919861B - 1,9D - 1997- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.1
III - 1H0919864J - 1995 - VDO - 93C46
III - 1H0919880A - 2,0i 8V- 95 TRW 93C46
III - 1H6919033A - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46
III - 1H6919033BD - 1,9TD r.v.1993 VDO - 93C46
III - 1H6919033M - 1,9TD VDO - 93C46
III 1,9D - 1992- 93C56 Motometer SW 5.8
IV - 1J0920820B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
IV - 1J0920820C - 93C86 - 1997 - VDO
IV - 1J5920825C - 93C86 VDO
IV - 1J0919860 - 93C66
IV - 1J0919860D - VWV - 24C02 - 1999 - MOTOMETER
IV - 1J0919860D - VWX - 24C02 MOTOMETER
IV - 1J0919861D - 24C02 - 1,6SR 1999 - Motometer
IV - 1J0919880B-MMO - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0919881B - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0919881D - 24C02
IV - 1J0919911 - MMO - 24C02 MOTOMETER
IV - 1J0919931D - 93C66
IV - 1J0920801E - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920802G BOO version - 24C02 - 1999 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920805E - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920805F - 93C86 - VDO - 2001
IV - 1J0920805G - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920806B - V02 - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J0920806B-PV - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920806C - 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J0920806E - engine 1,9TDi - 2001-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J0920821A - 24C02 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920821B - year 1999 dash VDO with 93C86
IV - 1J0920822C - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920825 - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - Motometer
IV - 1J0920825B - 24C02 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920826A - 24C08 - 1,9TDI - 2001 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920846C - 2002-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J0920906J - GTi - 2002-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J0920925A - 24C02 - 2001 - Motometer
IV - 1J0920926F - 93C86 - VDO - American model (MPH)
IV - 1J0920991A - 93C66
IV - 1J5920806G - 2003-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J5920826 - 2003-93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J5920826B - 2001-93C86 - VDO2
IV - 1J5920826C - 2003-93C86
IV - 1J5920845C - 93C86 - VDO
IV - 1J5920846A - 2002-93C86 - VDO
V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850E - 2003
V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850F - 2003
V - 24C16 - VDO dashboard - 1K0920850L - 2003

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (3 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF
GOLF

V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V

24C16
24C16
24C16
24C32
24C32
24C32
24C32
24C32
24C32
24C32

VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO
VDO

dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard
dashboard

1K0920850P - 2004
1K0920860K - 2003
1K0920860L - 2004
1K0920851A - 2004
1K0920851B - 2004
1K0920851F - 2004
1K0920851H - 2004
1K0920861 - 2004
1K0920861M - 2005
1K0920961B - 2005

JETTA
JETTA - 1K0 920 971C - 24C32 - VDO - 2005
JETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920806L - 2002-93C86 - VDO
JETTA 1,9TDi - 1J0920906K - 2002-93C86 - VDO (USA version)
LUPO
VW LUPO - 6X0920801D - BOO - 24C02 - Motometer
PASSAT
PASSAT - 357919033FC - 1993 - VDO - 93C46
PASSAT B4 - 3A0919860H - 1,9TDi - Motometer - 93C56 y.1996
PASSAT B5 - 3B1919860C - V018 with 93C66
PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880D - VWW1 with 93C66
PASSAT B5 - 3B1919880G - VWW1 with 93C66
PASSAT B5 - 3B1919890J - VWW0 with 93C66
VW PASSAT - 1J0919860B - 93C66
VW PASSAT - 1J0920842B - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
VW PASSAT - 3A0919033R - 93C56 Motometer - 94year
VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A B5 VDO V20 version !!!! - 93C86 - 1998
VW PASSAT - 3B0920802A BOO V18 version !!!! - 24C02 - 1999 - Motometer
VW PASSAT - 3B0920822A - 93C86 - 2000y - VDO
VW PASSAT - 3B0920847E - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920846AX - 93C86 - VDO - 2001
VW PASSAT B5 (B5V01) - 3B0920926B - 93C86 - VDO - 2001
VW PASSAT B5 (B5V06) - 3B0920927A - 93C86 - VDO
VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920805A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920847A - 93C86 - 2001 - VDO
VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86
VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920829A-B5V04 - VDO - 93C86
VW PASSAT B5 - 3B0920929B-B5V03 - VDO - 93C86
VW PASSAT B5V1 1997y. VDO 3B0 920 861B - 93C66
VW PASSAT B5V11 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
VW PASSAT B5V2 - VDO 3B0919881N - 93C66
VW PASSAT B6 (B6V08 ) - 3B0920827A - 93C86 - VDO
VW PASSAT B6 - 3B0920807A - 93C86 - VDO
VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870G - VDO - 24C32
VW PASSAT B7 -2005- VD1 3C0920870L - VDO - 24C32
VW PASSAT B7 -2006- VD1 3C0 920 870A - VDO - 24C32
VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 2U0035860 - (860D)
VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - VAG> 3B0919880A
http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (4 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 - sw V13AC or V11AB - 3B0919861


VW PASSAT with 68HC11KG4 (B5) Magneti Marelli - VAG> 3B0919860D
POLO
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW
VW

POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO
POLO

- 6K9 920 806B - 2000y. - 24C04 - TRW


- 6N0 919 860P - 1995 Motometer - 93S56
- 6N0 919 860R - year 1996 Motometer - 1,4i - 93S56
- 6N0 919 861A - Motometer 24C02
- 6N9 920 804D - 24C04 - TRW
- 6Q0 920 800 - 2002 VDO 93C86
- 6Q0 920 800M - VDO - 93C86
- 6Q0 920 800P - year 2002 VDO 93C86
- 6Q0 920 900H - year 2002 VDO 93C86
1,4MPi / 1997 - dash 6K9 919 033AK - VDO with 93C46
1,9TD / 1996 - dash Motometer with 93C66

SHARAN
Sharan 2 - 3B0920825A - 93C86 - 2002 - VDO
VW Sharan - 7M0 919 882D - with Motorola HC11E9
VW Sharan - 7M1 919 863B - with Motorola HC11E9
VW Sharan - 7M1 919 881 - with Motorola HC11A20
VW Sharan - 7M3 920 820C - 93C86 - 2000
VW Sharan - 7M3920840N - 93C86 - VDO
VW Sharan - 7M5920800EX - 93C86 - 2001y - VDO
TOUAREG
TOUAREG - 2004 - 2,5TDi - 7L6 920 880M - BOSCH
TOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 870L
TOUAREG - 2004 TDi - dash 7L6 920 880N - BOSCH
TOURAN
Touran
Touran
Touran
Touran
Touran
Touran

1T0
1T0
1T0
1T0
1T0
1T0

920
920
920
920
920
920

850A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003


860A - 24C16 - VDO - 2003
860C - 24C16 - VDO - 2003
860G - 24C16 - VDO - 2003
861A - 24C32 - VDO - 2004-2005
870F - 24C16 - VDO - 2005

23.04.2006 19:03

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (5 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

pepi
Routinier
Dabei seit: 09.11.2005
Beitrge: 360
Herkunft: vilnius lt

verschiedene fr SEAT und SKODA Freunde

SEAT
ALHAMBRA - 7M0920821H - 68HC11E20 (3E82K)
ALHAMBRA - 7M0919862B - 68HC11E20 (3E82K)
ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840C - VDO - 93C86
ALHAMBRA - 7M7920840H - VDO - 93C86
AROSA - . . . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02
CORDOBA - 6K0920821E - VDO - 93C66
CORDOBA - . . . . . . . Motometer - 24C02
IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . VDO - 93C46
IBIZA - 6K0920850F - VDO - 93C66
IBIZA - . . . . . . . . . . . -VDO - 93C46
INCA - 6K0919033FE - VDO - 93C46
INCA - 6K0919033HP - VDO - 93C46
INCA - 6K0920850 - VDO - 93C66
LEON - 1M0920800 - VDO - 93C86
LEON - 1M0920820 - VDO - 93C86
LEON - 1M0920821B - VDO - 93C86
LEON - 1M0920822E - VDO - 93C86
TOLEDO -VDO992655681 - VDO - 93C46
TOLEDO -1M0920801B - VDO - 93C86
SKODA
FABIA - 6Y0920860M - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y0920880M - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919870B - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919870C - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919870D - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1919880D - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1920870H - VDO - 93C86
FABIA - 6Y1920880H - VDO- 93C86
FELICIA - 6Y1919860C - VDO - 93C86
FELICIA - 6Y1919880C - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920810F - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U1919033A - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919033C - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919033G - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919033J - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919033L - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919034A - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919034B - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919034C - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U1919034G - VDO - 93C66

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (6 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

GTI-TDI Forum | FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden | Tachonummern

OKTAVIA - 1U1919034L - VDO - 93C66


OKTAVIA - 1U1919034S - VDO - 93C66
OKTAVIA - 1U0920810B - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920811B - VDO - 93C86
OKTAVIA - 1U0920811F - VDO - 93C86
SUPERB - 3UO920810C - VDO - 93C86
SUPERB - 3U0920811A - VDO - 93C86
SUPERB - 3U0920840A - VDO - 93C86
23.04.2006 21:17
Baumstruktur | Brettstruktur
Gehe zu: FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden
GTI-TDI Forum FAQ - Fragen, die immer wieder gestellt werden Tachonummern

Forensoftware: Burning Board 2.3.3, entwickelt von WoltLab GmbH

http://www.gti-tdi.de/board/thread.php?postid=7429 (7 of 7) [04/12/2007 22:00:31]

ECU list ver 18_01_08


-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Remove Immo - ECU works without immo
No description - ECU cleared and prepared for coding / autocoding
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo
2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04
Audi A3,A4,A6
Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)
BMW
Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)
Chrysler
Voyager 2.5 TD, Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli
Citroen
Berlingo - BSI - MCU NEC
Citroen
C3- BSI - MEM 95160
Citroen
Xara - BSI - MEM 95040
Citroen
Xara Picasso
- BSI - MEM 95040
Citroen
EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MA 3.0 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MA 3.1 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MP 3.2 Bosch 93CS46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MP 7.2 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
MP 7.3 Bosch 24C02 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
SID 803 PIN calculator (95320)
Citroen
SID 803 PIN programmer (95320)
Daewoo
Siemens TMS374
Fiat
Bosch - 24C02
Fiat
IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Mirelli
Fiat
IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli
Fiat
2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
Fiat
BPKA DELCO HC11F1
Fiat
Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11
Fiat
IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9
Fiat
IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9
Fiat
IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1
Fiat
IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
Fiat
IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
IAW 1G7SP.71 Magneti Marelli HC11F1 (c/r
immo)
Fiat
IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040
Fiat
IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)
Fiat
IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)
Fiat
IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)
Fiat
IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)
Fiat
IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
IAW 8F.5T
Magneti Marelli HC11F1
Fiat
IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11
Fiat
Lucas DCU3F 95080
Iveco Daily
Bosch 24C16
Kia
Clarus 2.0 16V Bosch 24C02
Kia
Siemens TMS374
Mazda
323 Diesel Denso 93C56
Mercedes
A class - Siemens/VDO 29F200
Mercedes
C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. ?
Mercedes
C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2
Mercedes
Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes
Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes
Start Error - Sprinter
Mercedes
Start Error - Sprinter (EWS OK)
Mercedes
Start Error - Vito HC05
Mercedes
Start Error - Vito HC08
Mercedes
Vito 24C04
- Unlock ECU
Pgina 1

Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel
Immo)
Opel
Opel
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Polonez
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Immo)
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Rover
Skoda
Toyota
Toyota
V.A.G
V.A.G.
V.A.G
V.A.G
V.A.G
V.A.G

ECU list ver 18_01_08


Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)
DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)
DTL - Bosch
Motronic based on 24C02 - Bosch
Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356
1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)
1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove
Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010
Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)
MP5.1.1 - Bosch
S2000 - Sagem (95080)
S2000 RPM - Sagem (95080)
S2000 - Sagem (95080) PIN progr.
BSI - De/encryption
ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.
ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc.
EDC 15 - 5P08C3
PIN prog.
EDC 16 - 95160
PIN prog.
EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)
EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)
206 BSI - MCU HC912
206 BSI - MEM 95160
307 BSI - MCU HC912
307 BSI - MEM 95160
2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374
IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374
IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400
IAW 6LP2.02 Magneti Marelli ST10F280
IAW 8P.XX Magneti Marelli HC11A8 MCU
Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512
Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
Delco HC11F1
5NR.XX - Magneti Marelli
DCI - Bosch
DCI - Delphi
DCI - Delphi (remove crash blockade)
DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo
DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo
Megane 2 (clear steering lock) 24C04
SIRIUS32 - Siemens
SIRIUS34 - Siemens
SIRIUS35 - Siemens
1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug), (Remove
1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)
Fenix 3 95160
IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370
IAW5NR2.XX 95160
S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM
Siemens TMS374
Siemens TMS374
Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)
214,216 93C46
SIMOS - Siemens
93LC66 + Texas 4C (Key programmer)
YarisDenso 93C46
EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)
EDC16 Bosch 95320
IMMO 5WK4 678
- HC05 - Siemens
IMMO 5WK4 678
- HC05 - Siemens
IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo
IMMO VW LT
- HC05X16
Pgina 2

V.A.G
V.A.G.
95040
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.

ECU list ver 18_01_08


IMMO White box
- 93C46 - f+g Megamos
ME7.1.(x) - 7.5.(x) Remove Immo Bosch
SIMOS - Siemens, 93C76, (Remove Immo)
TDI - Bosch
TDI 24C02 (1 plug) Bosch
TDI 24C02 (2 plugs) Bosch

Pgina 3

Eliminazione IMMO CODE Riverginatura file Adattamento


per preparazione allauto-ricodifica
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo
Alfa Romeo 156
Alfa Romeo

- 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04 5 connettori


- ECU - BOSCH Twin Spark, Remove Immo
- ECU - BOSCH 0 261 204 772 - 24C02 memory

Audi A3,A4,A6

- Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)

BMW

- Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)

Citroen
Citroen
Citroen
Citroen

Daewoo

- Siemens TMS374

Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat
Fiat

Iveco Daily

- Bosch 24C16

Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes
Mercedes

Kia

- Siemens TMS374

Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel
Opel

IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli


MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)
EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)

IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli


IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Marelli
Bosch - 24C02
IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11
2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
BPKA DELCO HC11F1
IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1
IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040
IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9
IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9
IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160
IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160
IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160
IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11
Lucas DCU3F 95080
IAW 8F.5T
Magneti Marelli HC11F1
IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374

Start Error - Sprinter


Start Error - Vito HC05
Start Error - Vito HC08
C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. 1/2
C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2
Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU
Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU
Vito 24C04
- Unlock ECU
A Class Siemens/VDO (29F200)

DTL - Bosch
DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)
Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)
Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 93C56
Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010

Opel
Opel
Opel

- Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)


- 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo)
- 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)

Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot
Peugeot

Polonez

- Delco HC11F1

PSA
PSA
PSA
PSA
PSA

- MP 7.2 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)


- MP 7.3 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)
- MA 3.0 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
- MA 3.1 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
- MP 3.2 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)

Group
Group
Group
Group
Group

S2000 - Sagem
MP5.1.1 - Bosch
IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374
Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512
Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.XX HC11A8 MCU
2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374
IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400
IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374
IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
S2000 RPM Sagem (95080)

Rover

- 214,216 (93C46)

Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault
Renault

Skoda

- SIMOS - Siemens

Toyota Yaris
Toyota Land Cruiser

- Denso 93C46
- 93LC66

V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.

DCI - Bosch
DCI - Delphi
DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo
DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo
SIRIUS32 - Siemens
SIRIUS34 - Siemens
5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli
Siemens TMS374
Fenix 3 95160
IAW5NR2.C5 95160
Siemens TMS374
1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)
1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug)
IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370
Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)
S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM

TDI Bosch
Bosch
EDC15
EDC16

Bosch
TDI 24C02 (1 plug)
TDI 24C02 (2 plugs)
Remove Immo (24c04)
Remove Immo (95320)

Calcolo PIN / Programmazione PIN


-------------------------------------------------------------------------Audi A2

- PIN decoder loaded 93C86-16

CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT

/
/
/
/
/
/

Berlingo
C3
Xara
Xara Picasso

BSI
BSI
BSI
BSI

MCU
MEM
MEM
MEM

CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN
CITROEN

BSI - De/encryption
EDC 15 - 5P08C3
PIN prog.
EDC 16 - 95160
PIN prog.
ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.
EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)
EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)

206
206
307
307

BSI
BSI
BSI
BSI
ECU

- MEM
- MCU
- MCU
- MEM
SAGEM

NEC
95160
95040
95040

95160
HC912
HC912
95160
S2000

PIN progr.

PSA
PSA

- SID 803 (Siemens) PIN calculator (95320)


- SID 803 (Siemens) PIN programmer(95320)

V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.
V.A.G.

EDC16 Bosch 95320


IMMO 5WK4 678
IMMO 5WK4 678
IMMO 6X0 953 257 IMMO VW LT
IMMO White box
-

HC05 - Siemens
HC05 - Siemens
24C04 - Valeo
HC05X16
93C46 - f+g Megamos

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

**************************************************************************
Immo Tool - Universal ECU / IMMO dump repair tool
**************************************************************************
**************************************************************************
Software version 2.08.07
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- Sirius 35 clear immo (29F400)
Renault
- Sirius 34 clear immo (29F200) type 1
Renault
- Megane 2 clear Steering loock (24C04)
Peugeot
- IAW6LP2.02 MM clear immo ST10F280
Software version 17.03.07
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- 1.9 DTI Bosch (1 plug) (NEW ALGO-Remove Immo)
V.A.G
- SIMOS, Siemens, remove immo (93C76)
Software version 11.03.07
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat
- IAW 1G7SP.71 MM, clear/remove immo (HC11F1)
Fiat
- IAW 59F.M2,M3,M7,M9 (NEW ALGO) (95080)
Fiat
- IAW AF.M1,M7,M9,S2 (NEW ALGO) (95160)
Fiat
- IAW 5NF.T1 (NEW ALGO) (95160)
Fiat
- IAW 1ABB.92 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
Fiat
- IAW 1ABG.81 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
Fiat
- IAW 1AF.1G (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
Fiat
- IAW 1AF.13,15,17 (NEW ALGO) (TMS374)
Renault
- Sirius 34 (NEW ALGO) (29F400)
Renault
- 1,5 DCI (remove crash blockade) (ST10F280+95160)
Software version 15.01.07
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------BMW
- SIEMENS MS 41.0 DME
Chrysler Voyager
- Bosch 24c02 remove immo
KIA
- CLARUS 2.0 16V Bosch (24C02)
Mazda
- 323 Diesel, Denso ECU (93C56)
Mercedes
- Start Error (5P08C3) - WSP OK
OPEL
- Motronic based on 24C02
V.A.G.
- ME7.1.(x)-7.5.(x) Bosch Remove Immo (95040)

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (1 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.


-------------------------------------------------------------------------PEUGEOT / CITROEN
- ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN calc.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- User interface changes

**************************************************************************
Software version 2.08.06
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G
- EDC16 Remove Immo (95320)
PSA
- MP 7.2 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)
PSA
- MP 7.3 Bosch Remove Immo (24C02)
PSA
- MA 3.0 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
PSA
- MA 3.1 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
PSA
- MP 3.2 Bosch Remove Immo (93CS46)
Peugeot
- S2000 RPM Sagem (95080)
Mercedes Benz
- A Class Siemens/VDO (29F200)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------PSA
- SID 803 (Siemens) PIN calculator (95320)
PSA
- SID 803 (Siemens) PIN programmer(95320)
**************************************************************************
Software version 16.06.06
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Audi A3,A4,A6
- Bosch 1.8 Turbo 24C02 (Remove Immo)
BMW
- Bosch 318 TDS 93C46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
- MP 5.2 Bosch 93S46 (Remove Immo)
Citroen
- MA 3.1 Bosch 24C04 (Remove Immo)
Opel
- 1.7 ; 2.0 16V Turbo Diesel 24C04 (Remove Immo)
Opel
- 1.2 8V Delco 27C256 (Remove Immo)
Peugeot
- Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.XX HC11A8 MCU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Peugeot / Citroen
- EDC15 PIN calculator (5P08C3)
Peugeot / Citroen
- EDC16 PIN calculator (95160)
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (2 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- User interface changes
- BB nr1 firmware update, Bus busy detection

**************************************************************************
Software version 18.04.06
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Citroen
- EDC15 5P08C3 (Remove Immo)
Fiat
- IAW 8F.5T
Magneti Marelli HC11F1
Fiat
- IAW 1AF.13 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
- IAW 1AF.15 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
- IAW 1AF.17 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Fiat
- IAW 1ABG.81 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Opel
- Bosch DTL 24C04 + 2x29F010
Opel
- Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 - 29F010 (Remove Immo)
Peugeot
- IAW 1AP.41 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Peugeot
- IAW 1AP.43 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Peugeot
- IAW 1AP.83 Magneti Marelli TMS374
Peugeot
- Sagem SL96 TMS374 2x28F512
Renault
- Sirius32 (16V) 29F200 (Remove Immo)
Renault
- S2000RPM 95080 - SAGEM
V.A.G.
- Bosch TDI 24C02 (1 plug)
V.A.G.
- Bosch TDI 24C02 (2 plugs)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------New BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.3)
- 95P08/5P08C3 memory programmer support added (BB nr1)
- Buffer verify function added
- Large user interface changes

**************************************************************************
Software version 30.12.05 - last upate in 2005 :)
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Opel
- Delco HC11F1 2 plugs (blue,grey)
Opel
- Siemens SIMTEC 56.1 9356
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (3 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Peugeot
FIAT
Iveco Daily

- IAW 48P2.XX Magneti Marelli 29F400


- Lucas DCU3F 95080
- Bosch 24C16

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Auto programm mode selector function added
Quick P.S voltage selector
USB/RS232 converters support improvements
Verifivation errors algo changes
New BB nr1 firmware (ver. 0.0.2)
-

Added 24C128, 24C256 I2C memory support


Added uWire 9346,56,66,86 - 8 and 16 mode memory support
Added SPI 95010, 95020, 95040 memory support
RS232 transparent mode added
Bootloader protocol changes

**************************************************************************
Software version 11.12.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- IAW 6R.20 Magneti Marelli TMS370
Renault
- IAW 6R.30 Magneti Marelli TMS370
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Byte swap function added.
Front end changes.
Programmer comunication protocol changes
**************************************************************************
Software version 16.11.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Mercedes
- Sprinter 24C02 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes
- Sprinter 5P08C3 - Unlock ECU
Mercedes
- Vito 24C04
- Unlock ECU
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Create bin file function added.
Screen dump function added.
Cr 16 programmer.
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (4 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

**************************************************************************
Software version 26.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Drag & Drop support
Parameter start-up
Universal file contents XOR procedure
**************************************************************************
Software version 19.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat
- IAW 59F.M2 (HYBRID)
Fiat
- IAW 59F.M3 (HYBRID)
Fiat
- IAW 59F.M7 (HYBRID)
Fiat
- IAW 59F.M9 (HYBRID)
**************************************************************************
Software version 19.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat
- BPKA DELCO HC11F1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Obliczanie/programowanie PIN.
Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G
- IMMO 5WK4 678
- HC05 - Siemens
V.A.G
- IMMO 5WK4 678
- HC05 - Siemens
V.A.G
- IMMO 6X0 953 257 - 24C04 - Valeo
V.A.G
- IMMO VW LT
- HC05X16
V.A.G
- IMMO White box
- 93C46 - f+g Megamos
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features
-------------------------------------------------------------------------I2C programmer (Hardware requiered BB nr1)
**************************************************************************
Software version 8.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat
- IAW 18F.B4 Magneti Marelli HC11F1
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (5 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Fiat
Fiat
Fiat

- IAW 49F.B4 Magneti Marelli 95040


- IAW 8F.5T Magneti Marelli HC11E9
- IAW 8F.6B Magneti Marelli HC11E9

**************************************************************************
Software version 7.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (1 plug)
Peugeot
- IAW 1AP.20,90 TMS374
Fiat
- IAW 4AF.M1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
- IAW 4AF.M7 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
- IAW 4AF.S2 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
- IAW 5NF.T1 Magneti Marelli 95160
Fiat
- IAW 8P.22 Magneti Marelli HC11
**************************************************************************
Software version 6.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------V.A.G.
- EDC16 Bosch 95320
**************************************************************************
Software version 5.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- 1.9 DTI Bosch 24C04 (2 plugs)
**************************************************************************
Software version 3.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Alfa Romeo
- 2.4 JTD Bosch 24C04
Fiat
- Hitachi MFI 003BC2 59C11
Fiat
- 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
Peugeot
- 2.3 JTD Bosch 5P08C3
**************************************************************************
Software version 1.09.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Renault
- Siemens TMS374
http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (6 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

Renault
Renault
Renault
Toyota Yaris
Toyota Land Cruiser
Fiat
Peugeot
Peugeot
Daewoo
Kia
Polonez
Rover

Fenix 3 95160
IAW5NR2.C5 95160
Siemens TMS374
Denso 93C46
93LC66
IAW 1ABB.92 TMS374
IAW 1AP.80, 81, 40 TMS374
Sagem SL96 TMS374 1x28F512
Siemens TMS374
Siemens TMS374
Delco HC11F1
214,216 93C46

-------------------------------------------------------------------------Additional features
-------------------------------------------------------------------------SPI programmer (hardware required BB nr1)
**************************************************************************
Software version 21.08.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------PEUGEOT / CITROEN
- ECU Bosch ME7.4.4 PIN progr.
PEUGEOT
- ECU SAGEM S2000
PIN progr.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Opel
- DELCO HC11F1 2 plugs (red,white)
**************************************************************************
Software version 20.08.05
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Fiat
- Bosch - 24C02
Mercedes
- C,E class (infra-red) - ECU progr. 1/2
Mercedes
- C,E class (infra-red) - Immo progr. 2/2
Opel
- DTL - Bosch
Peugeot
- MP5.1.1 - Bosch
Renault
- 5NR.CE1 - Magneti Marelli
Skoda
- SIMOS - Siemens
**************************************************************************
Software version 18.08.05 (first version)
**************************************************************************
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Calculate / programm PIN.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (7 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt

CITROEN
Berlingo
- BSI - MCU NEC
CITROEN
C3
- BSI - MEM 95160
CITROEN
Xara
- BSI - MEM 95040
CITROEN
Xara Picasso
- BSI - MEM 95040
PEUGEOT / CITROEN
- BSI - De/encryption
PEUGEOT / CITROEN
- EDC 15 - 5P08C3
PIN prog.
PEUGEOT / CITROEN
- EDC 16 - 95160
PIN prog.
PEUGEOT
206
- BSI - MEM 95160
PEUGEOT
206
- BSI - MCU HC912
PEUGEOT
307
- BSI - MCU HC912
PEUGEOT
307
- BSI - MEM 95160
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Adapt (prepare for self-coding) ,clear, repair immo file
-------------------------------------------------------------------------Citroen
- IAW G6.14 - Magneti Marelli
Fiat
- IAW 4AF.M9 - Magneti Marelli
Fiat
- IAW 16F.EB - Magneti Marelli
Mercedes
- Start Error - Sprinter
Mercedes
- Start Error - Vito HC05
Mercedes
- Start Error - Vito HC08
Peugeot
- S2000 - Sagem
Renault
- DCI - Bosch
Renault
- DCI - Delphi
Renault
- DCU3R - Lucas, Clear Immo
Renault
- DCU3R - Lucas, Remove Immo
Renault
- SIRIUS32 - Siemens
Renault
- SIRIUS34 - Siemens
V.A.G. group
- TDI - Bosch
---------------------------------------------------------------------------

http://www.tmw.netlook.pl/download/Historia_IT.txt (8 de 8)25/09/2007 09:21:33 p.m.

Eurocheck

La empresa

Potenciacin

Inmovilizadores

GNC / GLP

Reparaciones de ECU

Zcalos Inteligentes

Presin Positiva

Contctenos

Zcalos Inteligentes
Al realizar una conversin de unidad de mando para GNC, GLP o alcohol, utilizamos zcalos Bi-Fuel. Este
zcalo, se monta en la ECU a convertir en lugar de la memoria eprom original. Sobre el zcalo, se monta otra
memoria (de doble capacidad respecto a la original) con la informacin original del vehculo y adems, la
nueva informacin de combustible alternativo. El zcalo Bi-Fuel gestiona la conmutacin de los bancos de la
memoria, para que el vehculo tome lectura de la informacin correspondiente al combustible usado.

Diseamos y fabricamos todos los modelos de zcalos para todo tipo de vehculo. Utilizamos
materiales de primera calidad, placas testeadas electrnicamente, y un sistema de control de
calidad que nos permite reducir el margen de fallas al mnimo.

Zcalo Bi Fuel

Zcalo Jump. Orig

Zcalo Jumpeado

Algunos Vehculos

E-110
(Memoria original)
27C256
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C512

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (1 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

Chevrolet
Corsa

Vectra

Astra
Daewo Espero

Nubira

Eurocheck

E-120
(Memoria original)
27C512
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

Chevrolet
Corsa

Vectra

Astra
Daewo Espero

Nubira

27C256
27C512

E-130
(Memoria original)
27C512Latch
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

Renault 19

Clio
VW Gol 1000

Peugeot 205

E-140

E-120 con 27C512

E-210
(Memoria original)
27C512
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

Twingo
VW Gol
VW Polo

E-220
(Memoria original)
28F512
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

Renault
Megane

VW Gol
Chevrolet
Corsa 16V

27C010
27C020

E-210SE
(Memoria original)
27C512
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (2 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

Peugeot 306

Eurocheck

E-220SE
(Memoria original)
28F512
(Memoria a
Montar)
27C010

27C010
27C020

Peugeot 306

E-310
(Memoria original)
29F200
(Memoria a
Montar)
29F400

29F400
29F800

Peugeot 206
Renault Clio 2

Kangoo

E-311
(Memoria original)
29F200
(Memoria a
Montar)
29F400

29F400
29F800

VW Golf 4

Mdulos de Ford
Ford, a diferencia de las dems empresas automotrices, desarrolla sus
propias unidades de mando y sistemas electrnicos. La arquitectura
electrnica de los vehculos Ford, est pensada para facilitar los
trabajos de potenciacin e implementacin de sistemas Bi-Fuel (GNC,
GLP y alcohol).

Las unidades de mando de stos vehculos (EEC) disponen de un conector (J3), por donde se accede a los
datos e informacin de memoria. Contamos con un Lector/Programador Ford con el cual leemos estos datos
para luego modificarlos en funcin de las necesidades de nuestros clientes (ya sea potenciacin o gestin de
combustibles alternativos) y que adems, programa nuestros propios mdulos. Los mdulos programados, ya
sea con la informacin de potenciacin, o bien con la necesaria para gestin de combustibles alternativos, se
conectan en el J3 y el vehculo entiende que desde ese momento en adelante, no tiene que leer ms la
memoria eprom original, sino que debe leer la nueva memoria instalada dentro del mdulo. Para que el
vehculo vuelva a su estado original, no hay ms que desconectar este mdulo.

Es posible potenciar y realizar conversiones Bi-Fuel (GNC, GLP,

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (3 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

Eurocheck

alcohol) a todo vehculo marca Ford y VW con sistema de inyeccin


Ford (Mercosur, Autolatina ao 1993 a 1996).

Para mas informacin puede ver Equipos para reprogramaciones.

http://www.eurocheck.com.ar/v2/zocalos-inteligentes.asp (4 de 4)20/11/2007 13:10:29

SOFTWARE

SOFTWARE
FIAT IMMO 1.1

488 with 5P08C3 MEM


ECU - BOSCH with 24C02 memory e.g.
ECU - DELCO BPKA 2 plugs(beige+red)
ECU - HITACHI MFI 003BC2
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 16F.XX
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 18F.B4
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1ABB.92
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 1AF.1G
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 49F.B4
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M1
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M7
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.M9
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 4AF.S2
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 59F.Mx (Hybrid)
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 5NF.T1
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.5T
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8F.6B
ECU - Magneti Marelli IAW 8P.22

Mercedes START-ERROR

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (1 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

RENAULT IMMO 1.1

ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU

5NR2.C5 M.M. 95160, Delete Immo


DCI Bosch
DCI Delphi
DCU3R Lucas, Clear Immo
DCU3R Lucas, Delete Immo
DTI Bosch ( 1 plug )
DTI Bosch ( 2 plugs )
FENIX1 BVA Siemens HC11, Delete Immo
FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Clear Immo

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (2 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU
ECU

FENIX3 Siemens HC11E9, Delete Immo


FENIX5 Siemens TMS374
IAW 6R.2030 TMS370, Delete Immo
SIRIUS32 Siemens, Clear Immo
SIRIUS32 Siemens, Delete Immo
SIRIUS34 Siemens, Clear Immo
SIRIUS34 Siemens, Delete Immo

LICZNIK
- prepoet kilometrov

podporovan jednotky TU
IMMO KILLER
- vypnutie immo v BSI a riadiacch jednotkch

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (3 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

SOFTWARE

podporovan jednotky TU

http://www.decoding-service.sk/software.htm (4 of 4) [04/12/2007 22:07:38]

Tipos de Immo
Immo Tipo B

Immo Tipo A
Las flechas sealan para
ambos casos, el circuito
donde se colocaran las
pinzas.
El
punto
rojo
indicaque es la pata # 1 y
la posicin del lado blanco
pintado sobre las pinzas al
momento de colocar.
Pinza lado blanco.

Componente chicle de color azul.

Solamente el Immo tipo A es necesario


poner en corto con un caimn para poderse
leer, estas patas son las dos de la orilla de
las tres patas del componente que tiene
forma de un chicle de color azul.
y que por la parte inferior del Immo son las
nicas tres que sobresalen,
por lo cual es fcil identificarlas

Parte inferior del Immo tipo A


El Vag-Pin cuenta con dos botones al frente, el botn lado izquierdo es el botn de reset y el acceso
a leer el cdigo de 4 dgitos del Immo, el botn derecho nos sirve para escoger el tipo de Immo a leer
sea tipo A o tipo B . En caso de colocar mal las pinzas el Vag-Pin mostrara en su pantalla error en
pinzas, es importante verificar que las pinzas estn haciendo perfectamente el contacto con las 8 patas
del componente y que no quede ninguna pata de la pinza por encima del componente, y una vez que
sea ledo, verificar dos veces mas que te de el mismo numero de Immo, eso para descartar la posibilidad
de haber inducido ruido al momento de colocar las pinzas. El Vag-Pin se alimenta del conector de
diagnostico de cualquier auto con conector tipo OBD2, y se enciende desde el momento que se conecta.

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic

List of vehicles covered from function odometer change via OBDII:

Audi Q7 (CAN)
Audi A2 (K)
Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K)
Audi A4 VDO/M73 (K)
Audi A4 BOSCH - RB4 clusters (CRYPTO eeproms R/W by OBDII)
Audi A6 VDO (K)
Audi A6 (CAN)
Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004
Audi A8 (K) VDO93xx
Audi A8 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi TT (K)
Seat Alhambra (K)
Seat Altea (CAN)
Seat Arosa (K)
Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K)
Seat Ibiza VDO after 1999 (K)
Seat Leon (K+CAN)
Seat Toledo (K+CAN)
Skoda Octavia (K)
Skoda Octavia II (CAN)
Skoda Superb (K)
Skoda Roomster (K)
Skoda Scout (CAN)
Skoda Fabia (K)
VW Bora (K)
VW Beetle (K)
VW Caddy (CAN)
VW EOS (CAN)
VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB
VW Golf5 VDO (CAN)
VW Golf5 VISETEON
VW Crossgolf (CAN)
VW Individual (CAN)
VW Jetta (K+CAN)
VW Passat B5/B6 (K+CAN)
VW Polo VDO/Motometer (K)
VW Sharan (K)
VW T4/T5 VDO (K)
VW Touaran VDO (CAN)
VW Touaraeg
VW Phaeton
Bentley Continental

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic

Porsche Cayenne

List of vehicles covered from function security access code/login reading via OBDII:

Audi A2
Audi A3 (CAN) up to 2007 !!!
Audi A3 VDO/M73 up to 2003 (K)
Audi A4 VDO (K)
Audi A4 BOSCH (K) up to 2001
Audi A4 after 2000 - petrol engines >= 1.8
Audi A6 VDO (K)
Audi A6 (CAN) petrol engines
Audi Allroad (K) up to 2004
Audi Allroad (CAN) petrol engines
Audi A8 up to 2001
Audi A8 from 2001 to 2002 2.5TDI
Audi A8 (CAN) 2003+ petrol
Audi TT (K)
Audi Q7 petrol engines
Seat Altea (CAN)
Seat Cordoba after 1999 (K)
Seat Ibiza (VDO) after 1999 (K)
Seat Leon (K+CAN)
Seat Toledo (K+CAN)
Skoda Octavia
Skoda Octavia II (CAN)
Skoda Superb
Skoda Roomster
Skoda Scout (CAN)
Skoda Fabia
VW Bora
VW Beetle
VW Caddy (CAN)
VW EOS (CAN)
VW Golf4 VDO/Motometer/BOSCH RB
VW Golf5 VDO (CAN)
VW Crossgolf (CAN)
VW Individual (CAN)
VW Jetta (K+CAN)
VW Passat B5 (K) B6(CAN)
VW Polo5
VW Sharan after year 2000
VW T5
VW Phaeton petrol
VW Touareg petrol
VW Touaran VDO (CAN)

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic

PORSCHE Cayenne (CAN/K)

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Volkswagen Audi Group software for car diagnostic.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:17:23

1.1 Introduction
The ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter designed for easy access to
Motorola M68HC11/M68HC05 families of microcontrollers. The ETSMART MICRO
programming adapter lets you program unsecured members of the
M68HC11/MC68HC05 MCU families via serial boot strap mode.
1.2 ETSMARTUSB MICRO programming adapter hardware
The main features of the MICRO programming adapter are shown in the
following figure:

PIN 1

Control LED

Activity LED

PIN 1

Target IC ISP header


To target IC connector

ETMARTUSB header
To ETSMARTUSB
programmer connector

Master MCU

Figure 1

ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools
1

1.3 Device programming example


Explore OPEL SC303 car radio; target MCU MC68HC11E9

Figure 2
Select Device

Figure 3
Select Crystal Frequency

8000

Figure 4
The default value is 4000kHz (4Mhz). Set the frequency value according to the
crystal value (see Figure 8). Connect the MICRO programming adapter to the
target hardware then connect the explored car radio to the power supply
source (see Figure 7). Attach MICRO programming adapter to ETSMARTUSB via
flexible pin-to-pin cable then attach target device to 10-pins programming
adapter header J2 (see Figures 5, 6, 7, 8).
ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools
2

J1

J1

J2

J2
1 - TxD;2 - RxD;
3 - out1;4 - out2;
5- VCC;6 - VCC;
7 -GND;8 - GND;
9, 10 - + 10 V;

1
3
5
7
9

2
4
6
8
10

Figure 5

43Kohm
ETL 2005-2007

Figure 6

Microcontroller Tools
3

Figure 7

8000 kHz crystal


Pin 7 EXTAL
Pin 8 XTAL

Figure 8
The Figure 8 displayed connection between target equipment and MICRO
programming adapter. ETL strongly recommend use the laboratory power
supply source with current protection feature. A car battery is a bad
ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools
4

alternative to the laboratory power supply source during research and tests.
1.4 MICRO programming adapter schematic capture

Figure 9

ETL 2005-2007

Microcontroller Tools
5

User's Manual for

BeeHive4
Fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system

ELNEC s.r.o.
Presov, Slovakia
September 2005

ELNEC s.r.o.

COPYRIGHT 1997 - 2005


ELNEC s.r.o.
This document is copyrighted by ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. All rights reserved.
This document or any part of it may not be copied, reproduced or translated in any form
or in any way without the prior written permission of ELNEC s.r.o.
The control program is copyright ELNEC s.r.o., Presov, Slovakia. The control program
or any part of it may not be analyzed, disassembled or modified in any form, on any
medium, for any purpose.
Information provided in this manual is intended to be accurate at the moment of release,
but we continuously improve all our products. Please consult manual on
www.elnec.com.
ELNEC s.r.o. assumes no responsibility for misuse of this manual.
ELNEC s.r.o. reserves the right to make changes or improvements to the product
described in this manual at any time without notice. This manual contains names of
companies, software products, etc., which may be trademarks of their respective
owners. ELNEC s.r.o. respects those trademarks.

ZLI-0297A

ELNEC s.r.o.

Table of contents
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................4
BeeHive4 elements ................................................................................................................6
Manipulation with the programmed device.............................................................................6
Selftest and calibration ...........................................................................................................7
Technical specification ...........................................................................................................7
Setup ........................................................................................................................................12
Software setup .....................................................................................................................12
Hardware setup ....................................................................................................................16
Programming a device ...........................................................................................................19
Engineering mode ................................................................................................................19
Production mode ..................................................................................................................23
Troubleshooting and warranty ..............................................................................................27
Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................27
If you have an unsupported target device ............................................................................28
Warranty terms .....................................................................................................................28

Please, download actual version of manual from


ELNEC WEB site (www.elnec.com), if current one
will be out of date.

Conventions used in the manual


References to the control program functions are in bold, e.g. Load, File, Device, etc.
References to control keys are written in brackets <>, e.g. <F1>.

Terminology used in the manual:


Device
ZIF socket
Buffer
USB port
HEX data format

any kind of programmable integrated circuits or programmable


devices
Zero Insertion Force socket used for insertion of target device
part of memory or disk, used for temporary data storage
type of port of PC.
format of data file, which may be read with standard text viewers;
e.g. byte 5AH is stored as characters '5' and 'A', which mean
bytes 35H and 41H. One line of this HEX file (one record) contains
start address and data bytes. All records are secured with
checksum.

ELNEC s.r.o.

Introduction
BeeHive4 is fast universal 4x 48-pindrive concurrent multiprogramming system
designed for high volume production programming with minimal operator effort. The
chips are programmed at near theoretical maximum programming speed.
BeeHive4 supports all kinds of types and silicon technologies of today and tomorrow
programmable devices without family-specific module. You can be sure the next
devices support require the software update and (if necessary) simple package
converter (programming adapter), therefore the ownership cost are minimized.
BeeHive4 provides very competitive price coupled with excellent hardware design for
reliable programming. It has probably best "value for money" programmer in this class.
BeeHive4 consists of four independent isolated universal programming modules, based
on the BeeProg programmer hardware. Therefore the sockets can run asynchronously
(concurrent programming mode). Each programming module starts programming as
soon as the new chip is correctly inserted to the ZIF of programming module. It result
three programming modules works while you replace the programmed chip at the
fourth. The operator merely removes the finished chip and inserts a new chip. Operator
training is therefore minimized.
Modular construction of hardware - the programming modules works independently allows for continuing operation when a part of the circuit becomes inoperable. It also
makes service quick and easy.
BeeHive4 interfaces with the IBM PC/compatible, portable or desktop personal
computers through USB (2.0) port.
BeeHive4 provides very fast programming due to high-speed FPGA driven hardware
and execution of time-critical routines inside of the programmer. FPGA based totally
reconfigurable 48 powerful TTL pindrivers provide H/L/pull_up/pull_down and read
capability for each pin of socket. Advanced pindrivers incorporate high-quality highspeed circuitry to deliver signals without overshoot or ground bounce for all supported
devices. Pin drivers operate down to 1.8V so you'll be ready to program the full range of
today's advanced low-voltage devices.
BeeHive4 performs on each programming module device insertion test (wrong or
backward position) and contact check (poor contact pin-to-socket) before it programs
each device. These capabilities, supported by overcurrent protection and signature-byte
check help prevent chip damage due to operator error.
BeeHive4 has a built-in protection circuits for eliminate damage of programmer and/or
programmed device due to environment or operator failure. All ZIF socket pins of
BeeHive4 programmer are protected against ESD up to 15kV.

ELNEC s.r.o.
BeeHive4 has the selftest capability, which allows run diagnostic part of software to
thoroughly check the health of the each programming module.
BeeHive4 performs programming verification at the marginal level of supply voltage,
which, obviously, improves programming yield, and guarantees long data retention.
BeeHive4 provides a banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection to easy-to-implement
the ESD protection control.
Various socket converters are available to handle device in PLCC, SOIC, PSOP,
SSOP, TSOP, TSSOP, TQFP, QFN (MLF), SDIP, BGA and other packages.
It is important to remember that in most cases new devices require only a software
update due to the BeeHive4 is truly universal programmer. With our prompt service you
can have new devices can be added to the current list within hours! See AlgOR
(Algorithm On Request) service for details at www.elnec.com.
Advanced design including protection circuits, original brand components and careful
manufacturing allows us to provide a three-year warranty on parts and labour for the
BeeHive4 (limited 25,000-cycle warranty on ZIF sockets). This warranty terms are valid
for customers, who purchase a programmer directly from Elnec company. The warranty
conditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on the target country law system or
Elnec sellers warranty policy.
Free additional services:
free lifetime software update via Web site.
Free software updates are available from our
Internet address www.elnec.com.
Online technical support is available within promised 24 hours time limit or you may
call us during business hours from Monday through Friday 8:30 to 17:30 (CET).
Keep-Current is a service by which ELNEC ships to you the latest version of the
control program for programmer and the updated user documentation. A KeepCurrent service is your hassle-free guarantee that you always have access to the
latest software and documentation, at minimal cost.
AlgOR (Algorithm On Request) service allows you to receive from ELNEC software
support for programming devices not yet available in the current device list.

ELNEC s.r.o.

BeeHive4 elements
c 48 pin ZIF socket
d LED indicators for work result
e LED indicator power
f Banana jack for connecting ESD wrist strap

g Type B USB connector for PC BeeHive4 communication cable


h Power switch
i Power supply connector

Manipulation with the programmed device


After selection of desired device for your work, you can insert into the open ZIF socket
(the lever is up) and close socket (the lever is down). The correct orientation of the
programmed device in ZIF socket is shown on the picture near ZIF socket on the

ELNEC s.r.o.
programmer's cover. The programmed device is necessary to insert into the socket also
to remove from the socket when LED BUSY is off.
Note: Programmer's protection electronics protect the target device and the
programmer itself against either short or long-term power failures and, partly, also
against a PC failure. However, it is not possible to grant the integrity of the target device
due to incorrect, user-selected programming parameters. Target device may be not
destroyed by forced interruption of the control program (reset or switch-off PC), by
removing the physical connection to the programmer, but the content of actually
programmed cell may remains undefined. Don't unplug the target device from the ZIF
socket during work with device (LED BUSY shine).

Selftest and calibration


If you feel that your programmer does not react according to your expectation, please
run the programmer selftest using Diagnostic POD, enclosed with the standard delivery
package. For optimal results with programmer we also recommend you to perform
extended test by the calibration test procedure every 6 months at least. See instructions
for selftest in the Programmer menu.

Technical specification
SPECIFICATION (valid for each programming module)
HARDWARE
Base unit, DACs
USB 2.0 port
on-board intelligence: powerful microprocessor and FPGA based state machine
three D/A converters for VCCP, VPP1, and VPP2, controllable rise and fall time
VCCP range 0..8V/1A
VPP1, VPP2 range 0..26V/1A
autocalibration
selftest capability
protection against surge and ESD on power supply input, parallel port connection

ELNEC s.r.o.

Socket, pindriver
48-pin DIL ZIF (Zero Insertion Force) socket accepts both 300/600 mil devices up to
48-pin
pindrivers: 48 universal
VCCP / VPP1 / VPP2 can be connected to each pin
perfect ground for each pin
FPGA based TTL driver provides H, L, CLK, pull-up, pull-down on all pindriver pins
analog pindriver output level selectable from 1.8 V up to 26V
current limitation, overcurrent shutdown, power failure shutdown
ESD protection on each pin of socket (IEC1000-4-2: 15kV air, 8kV contact)
continuity test: each pin is tested before every programming operation

DEVICE SUPPORT (valid for each programming module)


Programmer

EPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 2708, 27xxx and 27Cxxx series, with 8/16 bit data width, full
support for LV series
EEPROM: NMOS/CMOS, 28xxx, 28Cxxx, 27EExxx series, with 8/16 bit data width
Flash EPROM: 28Fxxx, 29Cxxx, 29Fxxx, 29BVxxx, 29LVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx series,
from 256Kbit to 32Mbit, with 8/16 bit data width, full support for LV series
Serial E(E)PROM: 24Cxxx, 24Fxxx, 25Cxxx, 45Dxxx, 59Cxxx, 25Fxxx, 25Pxxx, 85xxx,
93Cxxx, NVM3060, MDAxxx series, full support for LV series
Configuration (EE)PROM: XCFxxx, XC17xxxx, XC18Vxxx, EPCxxx, AT17xxx, 37LVxx
1-Wire E(E)PROM: DS1xxx, DS2xxx
PROM: AMD, Harris, National, Philips/Signetics, Tesla, TI
NV RAM: Dallas DSxxx, SGS/Inmos MKxxx, SIMTEK STKxxx, XICOR 2xxx, ZMD
U63x series
PLD: Altera: MAX 3000A, MAX 7000A, MAX 7000B, MAX 7000S, MAX7000AE
PLD: Lattice: ispGAL22V10x, ispLSI1xxx, ispLSI1xxxEA, ispLSI2xxx, ispLSI2xxxA,
ispLSI2xxxE, ispLSI2xxxV, ispLSI2xxxVE, ispLSI2xxxVL, LC4xxxB/C/V/ZC, M4-xx/xx,
M4A3-xx/xx, M4A5-xx/xx, M4LV-xx/xx
PLD: Xilinx: XC9500, XC9500XL, XC9500XV, CoolRunner XPLA3, CoolRunner-II
other PLD: SPLD/CPLD series: AMI, Atmel, AMD-Vantis, Gould, Cypress, ICT, Lattice,
NS, Philips, STM, VLSI, TI
Microcontrollers 48 series: 87x41, 87x42, 87x48, 87x49, 87x50 series
Microcontrollers 51 series: 87xx, 87Cxxx, 87LVxx, 89Cxxx, 89Sxxx, 89LVxxx, all
manufacturers, Philips LPC series
Microcontrollers Intel 196 series: 87C196 KB/KC/KD/KT/KR/...
Microcontrollers Atmel AVR: AT90Sxxxx, ATtiny, ATmega series
Microcontrollers Cypress: CY8Cxxxxx
Microcontrollers ELAN: EM78Pxxx
Microcontrollers MDT 1xxx and 2xxx series
Microcontrollers Microchip PICmicro: PIC10xxx, PIC12xxx, PIC16xxx, PIC17Cxxx,
PIC18xxx, dsPIC series
Microcontrollers Motorola (Freescale): 68HC05, 68HC08, 68HC11 series
Microcontrollers Myson MTV2xx, 3xx, 4xx and 5xx series
Microcontrollers National: COP8xxx series
Microcontrollers NEC: uPD78xxx series

ELNEC s.r.o.
Microcontrollers Scenix (Ubicom): SXxxx series
Microcontrollers SGS-Thomson: ST6xx, ST7xx, ST10xx series
Microcontrollers TI: MSP430 and MSC121x series
Microcontrollers ZILOG: Z86/Z89xxx and Z8xxx series
Microcontrollers other: EM Microelectronic, Fujitsu, Goal Semiconductor, Hitachi,
Holtek, Princeton, Macronix, Winbond, Infineon(Siemens), NEC, Samsung, Toshiba, ...
Notes:
For all supported devices see actual Device list on www.elnec.com

Package support
support all devices in DIP with default socket
package support includes DIP, SDIP, PLCC, JLCC, SOIC, SOP, PSOP, SSOP,
TSOP, TSOPII, TSSOP, QFP, PQFP, TQFP, VQFP, QFN (MLF), SON, BGA, EBGA,
FBGA, VFBGA, UBGA, CSP, SCSP etc.
support devices in non-DIP packages up to 48 pins with universal adapters
programmer is compatible with third-party adapters for non-DIP support

Programming speed
Notes:
It is important to know, we always use random numbers pattern for programming
speed testing. Some our competitors use "sparse" pattern, where only few nonBlank data are programmed or are there are used data with only few 0 bits (FE, EF,
etc.). This cheating approach can "decrease" programming time considerable. If you
plan to compare, ask always which pattern they use.
The programming speed depends on PC speed only slightly.
Device
M50FW080 (parallel Flash)
AM29DL323DB (parallel Flash)
AM29DL640 (parallel Flash)
AT45D081 (serial Flash)
AT89C51RD2 (microcontroller)
PIC18F452 (microcontroller)

Conditions:

Size [bits]
100000Hx8 (8 Mega)
208000Hx16 (32 Mega)
400080Hx16 (64 Mega)
108000Hx8 (16 Mega)
10000Hx8
4000Hx16

Operation
programming and verify
programming and verify
programming and verify
programming and verify
programming and verify
programming and verify

Time B
32 sec
38 sec
76 sec
43 sec
15 sec
4 sec

P4, 2,4GHz, USB 2.0, Windows XP, 2.18 version of SW

SOFTWARE
Algorithms: only manufacturer approved or certified algorithms are used. Custom
algorithms are available at additional cost.
Algorithm updates: software updates are available approx. every 2 weeks, free of
charge.
Main features: revision history, session logging, on-line help, device and algorithm
information

Device operations
engineering mode
standard:
intelligent device selection by device type, manufacturer or typed fragment of part
name

ELNEC s.r.o.
automatic ID-based selection of EPROM/Flash EPROM
blank check, read, verify
program
erase
configuration and security bit program
illegal bit test
checksum
security
insertion test, reverse insertion check
contact check
ID byte check
special
production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion)
auto device serial number increment
statistic
count-down mode
production mode
All operations are controlled by project file.
standard:
blank check, read, verify
program
erase
configuration and security bit program
illegal bit test
checksum
security
insertion test, reverse insertion check
contact check
ID byte check
special
production mode (automatic start immediately after device insertion)
auto device serial number increment
statistic
count-down mode

Buffer operations
Only for engineering mode.
view/edit, find/replace
fill/copy, move, byte swap, word/dword split
checksum (byte, word)
print

Supported file formats


unformatted (raw) binary
HEX: Intel, Intel EXT, Motorola S-record, MOS, Exormax, Tektronix, ASCII-spaceHEX
Altera POF, JEDEC (ver. 3.0.A), e.g. from ABEL, CUPL, PALASM, TANGO PLD,
OrCAD PLD, PLD Designer ISDATA, etc.

10

ELNEC s.r.o.

SPECIFICATION (BeeHive4 multiprogramming system)


4x universal programming module (4x 48-pin DIL ZIF sockets)
operation result LEDs, LED power
USB 2.0 port
Line power input 100-240VAC/60W max.
banana jack for ESD wrist straps connection

PC system requirements
Microsoft Windows 2000/XP/2003/XP64 (XP and above recommended)
PC Pentium 4; 1.3 GHz (2GHz and above recommended)
256 MB of RAM (512MB and above recommended)
50 MB of free disk space (*1)
USB port 2.0 (2.0 high-speed recommended)
Note (*1): Free disk space requirement depends also on used IC device size. For large
devices the required free space on disk will be approximately 60MB + Device size

GENERAL
operating voltage AC 100-240V, max.1.2A, 50-60Hz
power consumption max. 60W active
dimensions 506x213x86 mm (19.9x8.4x3.4 inch)
weight (programmer) 4.8kg (10.58 lbs)
temperature 5C 40C (41F 104F)
humidity 20%..80%, non condensing

Package included
Standard accessories
BeeHive4 programmer
USB connection cable PC-programmer
diagnostic POD for selftest of the programmer (1x)
anti-dust cover for ZIF socket (4x)
user manual
software CD
registration card
calibration test report
transport case
Bonus pack:
ESD wrist strap with cord and banana plug
Vacuum pen
Gift (surprise)

Additional services

Keep Current.
AlgOR
free technical support (phone/fax/e-mail).
free lifetime software update via Web site.

11

ELNEC s.r.o.

Setup
The programmer package contains a CD with the control program, useful utilities and
additional information. The permission to freely copy the content of the CD is granted in
order to demonstrate how ELNEC's programmers work.
We recommended install software before connecting programmer to PC to avoid
unwanted complication during installation.

Software setup
Insert delivered CD to your CD drive and install program starts automatically (if not, run
setup.exe). Install program will guide you through the installation process and will do all
the necessary steps before you can first run the control program.
Step 1.

Click on Software installation PROGRAMMERS button.


Step 2.

Select language and than click on OK button.

12

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 3.

Click on Next button


Step 4.

For change default folder click on Browse button, select the destination folder.
Then click on Next button

13

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 5.

For change default folder click on Browse button, select the destination folder.
Then click on Next button
Step 6.

Check if Install Multiprogramming control support is selected. Change default


setting, if you want. Then click on Next button

14

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 7.

Check your setting and then click on Install button


Step 8.

Installation process will start.

15

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 8.

Click Finish button to finish setup.

New versions of programmer software


In order to exploit all the capabilities of programmer we recommend using the latest
version of PG4UW. You may download the latest version of programmer software (file
PG4UWARC.exe) from our Internet site www.elnec.com, part download.
Copy PG4UWARC.exe to a temporary directory, disconnect BeeHive4 from PC and
then launch it. Setup will start with Step 2 from previous chapter.

Hardware setup
Step 1.
Directly connect USB cable to type B USB port on programmer.
Step 2.
Directly connect USB cable to type A USB2.0 port on PC (high-speed recommended).
Step 3.
Connect connectors of power supply cable to appropriate connectors on programmer
and wall plug.
Step 4.
Turn on programmer. At this time all 'work result' LEDs light up successive and then
LEDs switch off.

16

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 5.
Windows will start with Found new hardware wizard.
For Windows XP, Service Pack 2 users only:

Select No, not this time and then click on Next button.
For all:

Select Install the software automatically and then click on Next button.

17

ELNEC s.r.o.
Step 6.

Click on Continue Anyway button.


Step 7.

Click Finish button to finish setup.


Step 8.
Found new hardware wizard will launch for each programming module. Hardware
setup will be continued with Step 5.
Note: If a different USB port on the PC is used for the next connection of BeeHive4,
Found new hardware wizard will launch and install new USB drivers.

18

ELNEC s.r.o.

Programming a device
BeeHive4 can operate in two modes:
Engineering mode
Production mode

for make a project


for mass production

Engineering mode
This part of the software is focused to the quick and easy preparation of the project file
for usage in the production mode control software.
Each programming module is driven by an easy-to-use control program with pull-down
menu, hot keys and on-line help. Selecting of device is performed by its class, by
manufacturer or simply by typing a fragment of vendor name and/or part number. It is
the same years-proven software, as is used for all other Elnec single-site programmers.
Engineer can use all properties of this software and can make a project for mass
production.
Standard device-related commands (read, blank check, program, verify, erase) are
boosted by some test functions (insertion test, connection check, signature-byte check),
and some special functions (autoincrement, production mode - start immediately after
insertion of chip into socket).
All known data formats are supported. Automatic file format detection and conversion
are doing during loading of file. There is possible to use Jam files (JEDEC standard
JESD-71) and VME files
The rich-featured auto-increment function enables one to assign individual serial
numbers to each programmed device - or simply increments a serial number, or the
function enables one to read serial numbers or any programmed device identification
signatures from a file.
The software also provides a many informations about programmed device. As a
special, the drawing of all available packages is provided. The software provides also
explanation of chip labeling (the meaning of prefixes and suffixes at the chips) for each
supported chip.

19

ELNEC s.r.o.

Make a project
1.

Connect programmer to PC and outlet. Turn programmer on.

2.
3.

Run the control program: double click on


Find BeeHive4 Site (programmer): <Ctrl+F> or right click on panel Programmer

20

ELNEC s.r.o.

In combo box Programmer select BeeHive4, Site and then click on OK button.
4.

Select site.

Select desired BeeHive4 Site# and then click on OK button


5.

Select device: click on

6.
7.

Load data into buffer from file: click on


Set Device operation options

21

ELNEC s.r.o.

8.

Set desired operations with a device and then click on OK button


To customize device use menu <Alt+S>

Set desired settings of a device and then click on OK button


Note: Menu <Alt+S> is depends on a device.

22

ELNEC s.r.o.

9.

Save project: click on


project etc.

and select destination folder, write a description of

For more details see Help for PG4UW or User manual for all ELNEC programmers.
Latest manual you may find it on www.elnec.com part download.

Production mode
This part of the software is focused to the easy monitoring of high-volume production
operations.
Operator-friendly control software (Pg4uwMC) combines many powerful functions with
ease of use. Graphic user interface provide overview of all important activities result
without burden of operator with non-important details.
There is used a project file to control the BeeHive4 multiprogramming system. Project
file contains user data, chip programming setup information, chip configuration data,
auto programming command sequence, etc. Therefore the operator error is
minimized, because the project file is normally created and proofed by engineering and
then given to the operator. The optional protected mode can be set for project file to
avoid unwanted changes of the project file.
Each chip may be programmed with different data such as serial number,
configuration and calibration information.

23

ELNEC s.r.o.

Step by step instruction


1.

Connect programmer to PC and outlet. Turn programmer on.

2.
3.

Run the control program: double click on


Search for connected programmer: <Ctrl+F> or Programmer / Search for
programmer.

In combo box Multiprogramming system select BeeHive4 and click on


Search button. After end of successful search click on Accept button to
finish Search of programmer.
4.
5.

or File / Load project


Load project: click on
Click on Connect programmers button to connect programming modules
to Multiprogramming Control panel.

6.

.
If
Select action with device: click on
desired action is selected, click on Run button. Desired action with devices
on all sites will be start. On Status window you may see current states of
action with devices on all sites. After end of action with device on Status
window will be displayed Please, insert a new device into socket for
appropriate site. After insertion of a new device into socket, desired action
with device will be start automatically.

24

ELNEC s.r.o.

7.
8.
9.

For end of work with desired device: click on Stop ALL button.
If you want continue with a new project go to step 4.
For end of work with BeeHive4 click on Disconnect programmers button
and then terminate a program: - <Alt+F4> or File / Exit.

Menu Programmer / Programmer Sites (or by right click on panel Site #) allows the
user to show or to hide Site window, refind a programmer site, disconnect site or run
selftest (Selftest plus) procedure for selected site.
Menu Options / Settings allows the user to verify or to change some setting of control
program.

25

ELNEC s.r.o.
On upper part of window is a table with some site properties: allowed or prohibit site,
Serial number, project file for site and programmed device.
If you check Site #, then desired site is allowed. If uncheck, then site is disabled.
If you check Use Site #1 project for all Sites, then project from Site #1 is the same
for all sites. If uncheck, then all sites can have different project files.
If you check Automatic YES!, then automatic start of action with device after insertion
device to ZIF is allowed.
Timer refresh rate defines how often the Pg4uwMC program will request status
information displayed in Status window panel from running PG4UW programs.
For more details see Help for Pg4uwMC software.

26

ELNEC s.r.o.

Troubleshooting and warranty


Troubleshooting
We really want you to enjoy our product. Nevertheless, problems can occur. In such
cases please follow the instructions below.

It might be your mistake in properly operating the programmer or its control program
PG4UW.
Please read carefully all the enclosed documentation again. Probably you will find
the needed answer right away.
Try to install programmer and PG4UW on another computer. If your system works
normally on the other computer you might have a problem with the first one PC.
Compare differences between both computers.
Ask your in-house guru (every office has one!).
Ask the person who already installed programmer.

If the problem persists, please call the local dealer, from whom you purchased the
programmer, or call ELNEC direct. Most problems can be solved by phone, e-mail
or fax. If you want to contact us by:
Mail/fax - Copy the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following the
instructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider being
relevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send the
completed form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program,
menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax please
use black ink, a good pen and large letters!
E-mail - Use "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form on the CD or from our Internet
site and fill it in following the instructions at the end of the form. Use standard
ASCII editor. Write everything down that you consider being relevant about the
programmer, software and the target device. Send the completed form by e-mail
to your local dealer or to ELNEC ((nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com).
Phone - Copy "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form and fill it in following the
instructions at the end of the form. Write everything down that you consider being
relevant about the programmer, software and the target device. Send the
completed form by mail or fax to ELNEC (fax number in the control program,
menu Help / About) or to your local dealer. If you send the form by fax please
use black ink, a good pen and large letters easily to read. Then call your local
dealer or ELNEC's customer support center (phone number in the control
program, menu Help / About). Please keep your manual, the programmer and
the completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form (just faxed) available, so that
you can respond quickly to our questions.
If your programmer is diagnosed as defective, consult your local dealer or ELNEC
about the pertinent repair center in your country. Please carefully include the
following items in the package:
defective product

27

ELNEC s.r.o.
completed "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form
photocopy of a dated proof of purchase
Without all these items we cannot admit your
programmer to repair.
Note:
You may find the "DEVICE PROBLEM REPORT" form at our Internet site
(www.elnec.com), section 'Support'.

If you have an unsupported target device


If you need to operate on a target device not supported by the control program for
programmer, please do not despair and follow the next steps:

Look in the device list of the latest version of the control program on our Internet site
(section Download, file corresponded to your programmer). Your new target device
might already be included in this version! If yes, download the file PG4UWARC.exe
and install the new version of the control program.
Contact ELNEC direct, filling up a "Device Problem Report" form following the
instructions at the end of this form. We may need detailed data sheets of your target
device and, if possible, samples. The samples will be returned to you after we
include your target device in a new version of PG4UW.

Note:
See also AlgOR service at our Internet site (www.elnec.com), section 'Support'

Warranty terms
The manufacturer, ELNEC s.r.o. Presov, Slovakia, gives a guarantee on failure-free
operating of the programmer and all its parts, materials and workmanship for three-year
from the date of purchase. This warranty is limited to 25,000-cycles on DIL ZIF socket
or 10,000-cycles on other ZIF sockets). If the product is diagnosed as defective, ELNEC
s.r.o. or the authorized repair center will repair or replace defective parts at no charge.
Parts used for replacement and/or whole programmer are warranted only for the
reminder of the original warranty period.
For repair within the warranty period, the customer must prove the date of purchase.
This warranty terms are valid for customers, who purchase a programmer directly from
Elnec company. The warranty conditions of Elnec sellers may differ depending on the
target country law system or Elnec sellers warranty policy.
The warranty does not apply to products that are of wear and tear or mechanically
damaged. Equally, the warranty does not apply to products opened and/or repaired
and/or altered by personnel not authorized by ELNEC, or to products that have been
misused, abused, accidentated or that were improperly installed.

28

ELNEC s.r.o.
For unwarrantable repairs you will be billed according to the costs of replacement
materials, service time and freight. ELNEC or its distributors will determine whether the
defective product should be repaired or replaced and judge whether or not the warranty
applies.

Manufacturer:
: ELNEC s. r. o., Post 5, P. O. Box 22, SK - 08005 Presov, Slovakia
: +42151/77 34 328, 77 31 007, fax 77 32 797
www.elnec.com, (nospam version) elnec at elnec dot com

29

REPETTO CRISTALES
SPY-CODE 2
Gracias por adquirir nuestro programador, por favor lea atte. las
Instrucciones antes de comenzar a trabajar con el mismo.
Vista del programador:

Detalle:
El programador cuenta con:
1 led de encendido (rojo) POWER que se enciende cuando se conecta a
La fuente de alimentacin 220v
2 leds de memorias ( 24xx / 93xx / 93xxxs /) (rojos)
3 led de corto ( amarillo )
4 led de estado LECTURA ESCRITURA ( verde )
5 Pulsador ( botn rojo ) seleccionador de memorias.

Vista trasera del programador:

Detalle:
1 Conector de fuente ( 12v)
2 Conector a PC ( salida Serial RS232 PUERTO COM )
3 Salida a Pinza ( CONECTOR )

Programas necesarios para el Funcionamiento del Programador:


IC-PROG Y PONY PROGRAM
Ambos se encuentran al inicio del CD

Para instalar el PONY program, presione el primer botn


( Pony prog Beta ) y una vez instalado presione el segundo
Boton ( Pony prog Spanish ) para cambiar el idioma al Espaol.
El IC-prog es un programa que no necesita instalacin, es ejecutable
Del CD, o puede copiarlo a su disco rgido ( ICPROG.EXE )
En el botn de Carpetas Varias encontrara toda la informacin
Correspondiente al uso del programador ( fotos / dumps / etc )
El ultimo botn contiene nuestra direccin de E-MAIL para
Soporte Tcnico.

FUNCIONAMIENTO:
1 Conecte la fuente ( 220v ) al programador y el LED de POWER
Se encender.
2 Al mismo tiempo que el led POWER se encienda tambin se
Encender el LED de la Primera memoria: 24xx
Para pasar a otro tipo de memoria se debe presionar el pulsador
(rojo) SELECT.
3 Una vez seleccionada la memoria se selecciona el tipo de memoria
En el software y se procede a la lectura o escritura
4 Si la pinza estuviera mal colocada o mal seleccionada la luz de
CORTO (amarilla) se encender, Verifique la conexin y seleccin
De la eeprom.
5 Durante la Lectura / Escritura el led PROGRAMING ( verde )
Se encender mientras dure la misma.

SOFTWARE: IC-PROG PONY Prog.


SETUP

Este programador es compatible con cualquier software de


programacin que permita la utilizacin de programadores
con conexin a puerto de serie.
A continuacin se detalla la configuracin de los software de
programacin: IC-prog y Pony Program.

IC-PROG:
Una vez abierto el programa, ir a Settings / ajustes, elegir
Options / opciones y seleccionar Language para pasar al
Idioma espaol.
Luego seleccionar otra vez ajustes, hacer clic sobre:
Tipo hardware F3 y aparecera la siguiente ventana:

Esta imagen corresponde a la configuracin para WINDOWS XP, En


caso de usar otra version de Windows la configuracin puede variar.
NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar segn la configuracin de cada PC

PONY-PROGRAM:
Una vez instalado el programa principal:

Se debe seleccionar: CONFIGURACION y Configuracin de


INTERFAZ y se abrira la siguiente pantalla:

Esta imagen corresponde a la configuracin para WINDOWS XP, En


caso de usar otra version de Windows la configuracin puede variar.
NOTA: El puerto COM puede variar segn la configuracin de cada PC

Luego de setear el programa se debe calibrar el programa con el


Programador, para realizar esto se debe igresar otra vez en:
CONFIGURACION y presionar CALIBRACION.
Una vez realizadas estas operaciones, el Programador esta listo para
Trabajar.
NOTA: la puesta a punto ( setup ) de los programas se realizan solo
una vez.

TOPWIN
Universal Programmer

User Manual

2004.10.

Content
Brief Introduction ............................................................................................ 3
Chapter I

Software Installation ..................................................................... 4

1.1

Software Installation ...................................................................... 4

1.2

Hardware Connection .................................................................... 5

1.3

Software Specification................................................................... 6

1.4

Main Window ................................................................................ 7

Chapter II
2.1

2.2

Chapter III

File Operation .............................................................................. 9


File Menu ...................................................................................... 9
2.1.1

Create New File................................................................. 9

2.1.2

Loading ............................................................................. 9

2.1.3

the Saving Buffer Zone ................................................... 12

2.1.4

Print ................................................................................. 12

2.1.5

Set up Printer ................................................................... 13

Modify Menu:.............................................................................. 13
2.2.1

Fill Buffer ........................................................................ 13

2.2.2

Find: ................................................................................ 14

2.2.3

Replace Characters: ......................................................... 15

2.2.4

Repeat Last Find (F3):..................................................... 16

2.2.5

Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone: ...................... 16

Device Operation ..................................................................... 18

3.1

Conventional Procedures ............................................................. 18

3.2

Operate Menu .............................................................................. 18


3.2.1 Select Type ......................................................................... 18
-1-

3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device ........................................... 20


Chapter IV SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test ........................... 29
4.1

SRAM Test .................................................................................. 29

4.2

Integrated Circuit ......................................................................... 31

Chapter V System Settings ......................................................................... 32


5.1

5.2

Set Menu ..................................................................................... 32


5.1.1

System Status .................................................................. 32

5.1.2

Set Additional Information .............................................. 33

Window Menu ............................................................................. 37


5.2.1 Tile .................................................................................. 37
5.2.2

Overlap ............................................................................ 37

5.2.3

All Displays ..................................................................... 38

5.2.4

Display buffer Window ................................................... 38

Appendix: Hardware Characteristics .................................................... 38

-2-

Brief Introduction
TopWin, a type of software developed for TOP series programmers, adapts
to the TOP hardware products of a new generation. TopWin has abandoned
its method of one type of software matching for one mode of TOP product
by operating different mode of hardware units. TopWin supports automatic
identification of hardware mode and function. Once TopWin connects to
hardware unit successfully, the name of hardware unit will appear at the
bottom of window. The current basic modes that TopWin supported
include TOP853, TOP2004, TOP2005 and TOP2048. Product of new mode
developed in the future will be supported by new version of TopWin
software.
TopWin supports multi-window operation, namely, it can connect multiple
programmers on a computer to write device without any interference.
Mode of programmer can be same or different. TopWin opens all devices in
order of alignment. In theory, the number of connected devices is out of
limitation.
TopWin supports Windows98se/Me/2000/XP.

-3-

Chapter I
1.1

Software Installation

Software Installationof (WINDOWS98SE / ME / 2000 / XP)

1.

To disconnect programmer (Dont connect with programmer).

2.

To operate Setup.exe in the CD and continues according to the


prompt.

3.

Lastly, press confirmation to restart computer.

4.

After complete Windows start-up, use matching cord to connect


with programmer. Computer will display the prompt of "find
new facilities" and presses continue until completion.

5.

To operate begin/program/TopWin.exe, because it is the first


installation, software has following prompt:

To press YES and wait for about five seconds, after blank screen vanish,
following prompt will arise:

-4-

Press OK to exit.
6.

To operate TopWin again, green light on programmer turns on,


lower right of software window shows equipment name topxxx,
it shows everything is in normal status and can have normal
operation. Please find the following:

1.2
1.

Hardware Connection
USB interface should support hot swap, it can operate computer
first and then reconnect programmer.

2.

To connect flat head of cord to USB interface of computer, square


head connect to programmer socket.

(Both sides of cords are

different and must have separation.) When power indicator turns


-5-

on POWER (red), it means power supply of machine has been


put through.
3.

To operate on TopWin program, after two to ten seconds,


programmer working indicator" READY" (Green) turns on,
bottom of window shows the name of hardware unit topxxxx. It
shows that machine had ready and can have normal operations.

4.

To open set up \ system status in the main menu and press testing
USB load current, it show that from grade five to grade ten is
normal, the higher the grade, the stronger the driving force.
Electric current of grade five can write most of devices, some
specific high-current devices need the electric current above grade
seven. Most of the computers can reach to grade seven or more. If
the computer is below grade five, it can connect cord (it should
buy it additionally) or to circumscribe 5V / 2A regulated power
supply (specific model have accessories, please check hardware
specification).

1.3

Software Specification

TopWin dont support old models of TOP851 / 852 / 2000 / 2003 /


48.

It is possible that D version XP of early age can not operate.

In normal conditions, it can see following information in my


computer/control panel/system/device manager:
-6-

After connect programmer

(Jungo/Top programmer/ WinDriver):

If no programmer find,show as:

1.4

Main Window
After TOPWin start-up, main window of TOPWin will be showed on

the screen as follows:


-7-

Software interface is composed by menu bar, toolbar, buffer zone, status


bar and report group, therein five menus include all functions and options of
TOPWin operation, set up common icon button in toolbar, it has the
completely same effect to the operation which use in the menu. To use the
methods of click can make command transfer more convenient and rapid.
It should conduct explanation with the main thread of menu function for
software application methods.
Note:
It can also operate on TOPWin software under the conditions of not
-8-

connect with programmer. After get the prompt of can not turn on
equipment, press OK to enter offline operation.
For the operation which concerned with device read and write, it should
operate in the corresponding dialog box after select the model.

Chapter II
2.1

File Operation

File Menu

"File" menu includes the file access and print operation, the format applies
to binary system, hexadecimal and JECED. The file menu's functions are:
2.1.1

Create New File

to create a new file.

2.1.2

Loading

The corresponding tool icon button is "Loading"; to open an existing file in


the main window, and the file window will spring out after the performance:

-9-

Select the file name, and then select the file format in the format dialog
box:

- 10 -

After confirming the file format, start and end address of buffer zone
of the opening file, load the file data into the buffer zone, it will run as
follow:

After the loading of file data into the buffer zone, if required to amend,
move the mouse or keyboard to the relative byte and input the number
directly. But the input number must be two hexadecimal numbers.
If there is a large volume data, and the target data is not in the window,
please use editing key "Page Up", "Page Down", "Home" and "End" to turn
page, or you can input the address on the right of the "Start Address" at the
bottom of the data window and press "Enter", the window will move to the
"Address" immediately.
- 11 -

PLD device introduces JECED formatted file of fuse diagram info


with the extension of ".JED", after the data is loaded into the buffer zone, it
will run as follows:

2.1.3

the Saving Buffer Zone

Its corresponding tool icon button is "Save", it is to save the content of the
buffer zone.
2.1.4 Print
Select the file mode of printing and print the file

- 12 -

2.1.5

Set up Printer

Specify the type of the printer and its ports

2.2

Modify Menu:
The operation is to edit the data in the buffer zone.

2.2.1

Fill Buffer

The corresponding tool icon button is "Fill Buffer". The operation can fill in
the buffer zone units with required data.
Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs, input the start
address, end address of the infill block, and the data to be filled in, and
press "Yes".

- 13 -

2.2.2

Find:

The operation is to find the named data in the buffer zone, and only
two hexadecimal characters (no case sensitive) can be input. After the
performance, the standard finding dialog box springs as follows:

- 14 -

Press "find next" to find now. And continue to press "find next" to find
again.

2.2.3

Replace Characters:

The operation is to replace the text characters. After the performance,


springs out the dialog box of Replacing as follows:

Input the text to be substituted in "Find what" frame, or paste from


the clipboard.
Input the text to replace in the "Replace With" frame.
Press "find next" first to find the character string to be replaced;
- 15 -

Press "Replace" (p) button to perform the replacement.


Note: To replace the next, you must press "find next" first, and then
press "Replace" to perform replacement.
2.2.4

Repeat Last Find (F3):

For the text which has been found once before, you can press F3 to
find the next position repeatedly.
2.2.5

Extend or Shrink the File Buffering Zone:

The size of the file buffering zone is typically similar with the file size.
If you want to add data, you must extend the end address of the file
buffering zone.
Select "Change Buffer Size", the dialog box springs out, input the end
address on the right of "End Address" and then presses "Yes".

- 16 -

Data filling, extending or shrinking the file buffering zone can also be
performed in the buffer zone area by clicking the right button of the mouse.
The menu popup is as follows:

- 17 -

Chapter III

3.1

Device Operation

Conventional Procedures
Connect to TOPWin correctly; power indicator (red) turns on.
Run TOPWin.exe, and working indicator (green) turns on.
Select File in the main menu, and upload data to the file buffer.
Insert the device into the socket and lock it up, and then be ready for

written-in and read-out operation of device.

3.2

Operate Menu

3.2.1 Select Type


The corresponding device button is Type; pull down the pop-up
Window of Select Manufacturer/Type after operation.

- 18 -

The procedures to select Type of device are to confirm the type of


device in order of Type->Manufacturer->Type.
Input key word in the right of Search in first line; if the key word
is 51, this step can be omitted.
Select Type of Device in the Type menu, like EEPROM.
Select a manufacturer from the list of Manufacturer, like
ATMEl.
Select a device type from the list of Device, like select 89c51.
If select a memory, press Detect Manufacturer Code to a get 2-byte
code, the first byte of which denotes a manufacturer and the second one
denotes a device type.
- 19 -

And then, press Confirm to enter write-in and read-out operation.

3.2.2 Read-Out and Write-In Device


The corresponding device button is Read/Write; Different device types
have different read/write windows correspondingly. They are respectively
described as follows:
1. Read-Write Combined Memory
Take 29c010 for example, select the following item from the Window
of Select Manufacturer/Type
Type: EEPROM
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: AT29C020
Press Confirm, pop up combined memory read-write Window as
follows:

- 20 -

Write-in Device
The write-in device is to write the data of the buffer into a device. The
default values of File Start Address and Device Start Address are 0, which
implies writing data into all the units of this device. While the length of the
data can be up to six bits hexadecimal (HEX) numerals and the maximal
address space is 8M. If necessary, user can follow required conditions to
modify start address, so as to fulfil the intention to write in.
The procedures to write in device are visually displayed via a
progress bar. If confront with some units fail to write in, it will exit from
- 21 -

the write-in procedures and display fault address, data in buffer and
contents of device data.
Cautions:
Before write in device, special attention should be paid to not to
mistake device types, otherwise, device or devices might be damaged,
owing to the device types are totally different, the corresponding serving
programming voltage might be different. After confirm all configurations
are all right, insert the device to be programmed into the corresponding
sockets, and then level lock-up spanner.
Read-Out Device
Read out all the data in the device and write them in the buffer, and
then do page display in the data Window. The read-out procedures are
visually displayed via progress bar. User can modify the read-out data and
store them into a disk (the format of the file should be consistent with the
built-in file format of the device).
Erasing:
Erase all contents of the device memory. After being erased, the
device shows FF. Only EEP device can use this command, and EPROM
needs to be erased with ultraviolet radiation.
Blank Check:
Before write in device, it is required to check whether there is a blank.
Each byte of the Blank is FF (HEX).The check-out procedures are
visually displayed via progress bar. When find out some non-blank unit, it
will exit from the blank check-out procedures and display the address and
- 22 -

data of the non-blank unit.


This operation will check out all address space of EPROM, which is
independent of the device start address or the data length. EPROM can be
checked after being irradiated with uviol lamp, if still fail to pass, it is
proved that the device was already damaged.
Data Censor:
This operation compares the data in the buffer with those in the device,
which is visually displayed via progress bar. When confront with any unit
fails to be censored, it will exit from the data censor procedures and visually
display the fault unit address, the data in the buffer and the device data.
For ensuring the written-in data in the device are correct, the write-in
device operation should include the censor procedures. Therefore, no
repetition of the same operation is required.
Protection:
Many EEPROM and FLASH ROM have protection functions. The
device with protection function can only be read out, instead of being
written into, unless invalidate the protection function. This operation is
generally applied with completion of write-in operation.
Protection Invalidation:
It is in reverse with that of protection function.
Read-Out Manufacturer:
The former byte of the two-byte read-out code denotes the
manufacturer, and the latter one denotes the type.
Write-In Speed
- 23 -

The programming speed of products by different manufacturers is


totally different, and even if some products with different types are made by
a same manufacturer, their programming speed might be different. It can
generally be set into the standard speed.
Automated Programming Operation
This operation will automatically finish the device programming on
the base of the selection in box of Combined Operation, which can
advance the programming efficiency of device.
2. Read-Write MCU/MPU
Take 89c51 for an example, select the following items from the
Window of Select Manufacturer/Type
Type: MCU/MPU
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: AT89c51
Press Confirm, pop up a MCU/MPU read-write Window as
follows:

- 24 -

The following operation procedures are as same as those of the


combined read-write memory.
Write-in Device, Read-out Device, Erasing, Check Blank, Data Censor,
Manufacturer Read-Out, and Automated Operation.
Encryption:
The encryption method can adopt different method to encrypt the
MCU/MPU.
Check-Out Voltage
The device working at lower voltage should select corresponding
check-out voltage to verify written-in codes, so as to ensure the written-in
codes are all correct. The check-out voltage wont influence on the write-in
voltage and the read-out voltage.
Write-In Speed:
There are only two options available. With manufacturers rapid
- 25 -

reform of processing crafts, the delay time to write in device may be


different. In generally, lower speed is better, although it may waste much
time.
3. Read-Write Serial Port Memory
Take 24c02 for example, select the following items from the Window
of Select Manufacturer/Type
Type: Serial Port Memory
Manufacturer:
Device: 24c02
Press Confirm, pop up serial port memory read-write Window as
follows:

- 26 -

Select Write-In Speed:


The write-in speed of the serial port memory has much variation. It is
not wrong to select the lowest one, while the write-in period might be longer.
If proper speed is required, it is recommended to select different speed
experiments to achieve. When the speed is too high, the adjacent data might
encounter with repeated faults. In generally, it is relatively suitable to adopt
2-20mS.
Read-Out Device:
It has the functions as same as those of the combined read-write
memory.
Write-in Device
These series of device are written in replacement mode, namely, these
apparatuses are in no need of being erased.
Comparable Data:
It has the functions as same as those of the combined read-write
memory.
4. Read-Write PLD
Take ATF20V8B/L for example, select the following items from the
Window of Select Manufacturer/Type.
Type: Programmable Logical Drive
Manufacturer: ATMEL
Device: ATF20V8B/L
Press Confirm, pop up a PLD read-write Window as follows:
- 27 -

Read-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the


combined read-write memory.
Write-in Device
Before write the data of the file buffer into a device, it is required to
get the file data be ready in advance. PLD device adopt the "fuse file with
extension of .JED in format of JECED, and the device should be blank,
otherwise, it will fail to be written into.
Check-Out Device: It has the functions as same as those of the
combined read-write memory.
Erasing Device:
The original contents in the erasing device include and/or matrix fuse,
structure control field, attribute field and so on.
- 28 -

3.3

Automatically Detect Manufacturer and Type:

Chapter IV

SRAM and Universal Integrated Circuit Test

4.1 SRAM Test


With the example of 628128, select in Select Manufacturer/Type box
Category: SRAM Test
Manufacturer: STAND
Part Series: 628128 128K * 8
Press Yes button, popup SRAM Test Window as follows:

- 29 -

The menu is chiefly used to test the common static storage SRAM. Press
Auto button, and the programmer tests each byte of memory to ensure the
test is performed stably.
Reading and writing operations of self-battery static memory are reserved
in the operational functions, such as many series of products produced by
DALLAS manufacturers, to meet some users' requirements.

- 30 -

4.2

Integrated Circuit

(The Contents are unsuitable for TOP853)


It is available for testing the performance and logic function of thousands
of types of products in 74, 45 and 30 series. Take 74HC245AP as example.
Select in Select Manufacturer/Type box.
Category: TTL/CMOS Test
Press Yes button, popup Test Window as follows:

Select Series and Type of the tested device, and press testing button. In case
that the device is normal, the speaker beeps a time, otherwise beeps three
- 31 -

times.

Chapter V

5.1
5.1.1

System Settings

Set Menu
System Status

The corresponding button is Link


1. Win version information
Display the version information of programmer software
2. Programmer Type
Display the type of current programmer.
3. Test USB load current
Displaying the grades from 5 to 10 represents norm, the higher grade is, the
stronger driving is. For example, in case of the grade lower than 5, connect
keyboard power supply cable (additionally purchase), otherwise connect
external 5V/2A regulator (Refer to the hardware specification in case that
specific model is outfitted with accessories).
4. Serial Number (SN)
- 32 -

Display the serial number of hardware of current programmer. To prevent


from illegally modeling, each TOP programmer corresponds to an
exclusive serial number so that the modeled product cannot access to
software update services.
5.1.2 Set Additional Information
TOPWin offers Additional Information. Additional Information refers to
the subparagraph information separated from user code, and auto changes
with writing, which can be used for software encryption or other uses. The
Window showed as follows:

- 33 -

The Window includes three option items, with which the user can make
settings in accordance with their own requirements.
1. Linear Increment Option:
Input the address of additional information in Start Address edit box, and
the address generally behind files must reserve an unspent space in the
device. If the space of device is full of user files' code, the additional
information cannot be written again.
Select byte size of information in Byte Size edit box, the max is 8-byte
- 34 -

(64-byte binary integer).


Input an initial integer in Number Value edit box, the integer will change
later.
Select increment that is integer in Increment edit box. If there is a negative
sign in front, the integer is Decrement.
Select Allowable Linear Increment.
2. Date & Time Option:

Input the address of accurate date in Start Address edit box.


- 35 -

Select Allowable Date & Time.


Date & Time that needn't be input by user is auto created by computer.
3. Quantity Option: (The contents is unsuitable for TOP853)

Quantity Mode: if allowable, press Auto button a time while writing a


device, and then it can auto detect whether the device is pinned securely.
Once the device is properly installed, the writing process starts instantly.
After fully running a time, it will display "OK, Please take away the
completed device". Once take away the device, it display "Place a new
- 36 -

device". After place a new device, the program will auto-cycle operation as
testing all pins well connected. Avoid repeatedly pressing mouse, and be
suitable for writing in large quantity.
Note: Exit circulation in case of not inserting a new device within 5
minutes.
Test the pins' connecting state: If allowable, test whether the pins of a new
device are well connected in each individual operation, in case that any pin
is poorly connected, report immediately, and stop operating.
Speedily test overrun electric current: Even if the Option is forbidden, the
result from testing overrun electric current is available, except for slowing
down the speed and desensitizing the test.

5.2

Window Menu

5.2.1 Tile
The opened file data are displayed in the entire data buffer.
5.2.2

Overlap

All opened files are displayed in overlap mode.


- 37 -

5.2.3 All Displays


Display all opened files, each Window non-overlapping.
5.2.4

Display buffer Window

Display the file data of buffer or the written data from a device.

Appendix: Hardware Characteristics


TOP853 Universal Programmer
TOP853, featured by small size, low power consumption and high
reliability, is a universal mode of programmer designed for
developing MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories.
TOP853 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and
high unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit
for mobile use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
z
z

Support 5V device;
Adopting USB interface power supply in stead of external power
supply;
- 38 -

Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a

transmission

rate of 12MHz/s;
z

Adapting to battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;

Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against


damage;

USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);

40-pin universal locking socket;

Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;

Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;

Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;

MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;

Performance and Specifications:


1Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)
2Volume: 142 x 103 x 23
3Weight: 250g
4Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
5Locking bed: 40 pin home-made socket
TOP853 Suite:
- 39 -

1. A TOP853 host;
2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
3. A TOP853 Universal Programmer instruction book;
4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
5. A TopWin software CD attached.
TOP2048 Programmer
TOP2048 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing
MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of
small size, low power consumption and high reliability.
TOP2048 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high
unfailing performance without external power supply, so it is fit for mobile
use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
z
z

Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;


Adopting USB interface power supply as well as 5V external power
supply;

Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transmission


rate of 12MHz/s;

Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;

Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against


damage;
- 40 -

USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);

Allpin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;

48-pin imported universal locking socket adapting to all kinds of


universal adaptors;

Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;

Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;

Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;

MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;

Performance and Specifications:


1Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)
2Measured speed(PIII/800M,Windos98se,USB1.1)
28F320 write & check, 104 seconds
29LF320 write & check, 112 seconds
P89c58 write & check, 5 seconds
3Volume: 155 x 110 x 26
4Weight: 350g
5Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
- 41 -

6Locking bed: 48-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable)


TOP2048 Suite:
1. A TOP2048 host;
2. A 5V/2A regulated power supply (alternated);
3. A SDP-UNIV-44 universal adaptor (simple);
4. A PLCC32 adaptor (simple);
5. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
6. A TOP2048 Universal Programmer instruction book;
7. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
8. A TopWin software CD attached.
Typical Universal Adaptor Reference
1. SPD_UNIV-44 PLCC44 (*P44)
2. SPD_UNIV-44 SOP44 (*Q44)
3. PLCC32
4. SOP44
5. SDP-UNIV-48 TSOP48
6. SDP-UNIV-40 TSOP40
7. SDP-UNIV-i320 uBGA48
TOP2005 Programmer
TOP2005 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing
MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of
- 42 -

small size, low power consumption and high reliability.


TOP2005 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high
unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing
use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:

suporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;

z Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power source


z Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of
12MHz/s;
z Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
z Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against damage;
z USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
z All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;
z 40-pin imported universal locking socket;
z Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
z Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
z Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
z MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
- 43 -

1Software: TopWin(for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)


2Volume: 142 x 103 x 23
3Weight: 250g
4Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
5Locking bed: 40-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable)
TOP2005 Suite:
1. A TOP2005 host;
2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
3. A TOP2005 Universal Programmer instruction book;
4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
5. A TopWin software CD attached.
TOP2004 Programmer
TOP2004 is a universal mode programmer designed for developing
MCU/MPU and writing all kinds of memories with the characteristics of
small size, low power consumption and high reliability.
TOP2004 adopts USB universal serial port to connect PC, which offers
high rate of transmission, high interference free performance and high
- 44 -

unfailing performance without external power source, so it is fit for outing


use of battery-powered notebook PC.
Characteristics:
z Supporting 2.5 to 6.5V devices;
z Adopting USB interface power source in stead of external power
source
z Connecting PC through USB universal serial port at a transfer rate of
12MHz/s;
z Supporting battery-powered notebook PC as well as desktop PC;
z Perfect over-current protection to programmer and device against
damage;
z USB loading capacity testing (0 to 10 grade);
z All-pin inspection is able to find the contacting status of every pin;
z 40 pin imported universal locking socket;
z Operating under WINDOWS98SE/ME/2000/XP;
z Plastic shell, small size, light weight and low power consumption;
z Supporting automatic-detection of manufacturer and mode;
z MCU/MPU timing, programming speed is independent of computer;
Performance and Specifications:
1Software: TopWin (for windows98se/2000/ME/XP)

- 45 -

2Volume: 168 x 115 x 26


3Weight: 280g
4Power: < 2.5w (5v/500mA)
5Locking bed: 40-pin imported socket with high quality (replaceable)
TOP2004 Suite:
1. A TOP2004 host;
2. A connecting cable of standard USB 1.1 (compatible with USB2.0);
3. A TOP2004 Universal Programmer instruction book;
4. A TopWin Software Operation Manual;
5. A TopWin software CD attached.

- 46 -

Willem Programmer revision 3.1 with EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter


Two adapters were built to use the EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter :
First an EZO DIP32 to 32 pin connector is installed in the Willem ZIP socket.
Second, the TSOP40_A3 adapter is plugged on the DIP32 adapter.

Chip programmed :

Intel E28F004-B5T80 (COMPAQ M700 BIOS CHIP - corrupted)

EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter settings :


JP7 set
JP8 set (a second pin set has been soldered on the other side of the adapter so that
jumpers can be placed on both JP7 and JP8 at the same time)
The other 5 pines connectors is left OPEN (not used)
Remarks :
1- Pay attention when soldering the TSOP Meritec adapter on the board. There is an unused track on the left
side of TSOP40 pin1. Don't know why ?)
2- The Meritec TSOP socket is rather cheap BUT extremely difficult to solder on the PCB.
The following method was used:
Gently "wet" all TSOP soldering tracks with fine solder (0.6mm) and a fine soldering tip.
Gently "wet" each MERITEC soldering pin.
(if pines are shorted, you can easily remove the short with an ordinary pump.)
Then apply flux on the soldering locations with a flux pen.
Carefully align the Meritec socket and solder one pin on each side, i.e pin 1 and 40.
Then, following the pre-wetted copper tracks from outside to the each pin, push the solder
to each pin so that each pin is soldered correctly. The process has sometimes to be repeated,
after putting additional flux.
If there is a short between two pines, it can be removed ONLY with solder sucking wick !
(The pump nose is too tick)
Thoroughly clean (alcohol) any excess flux, as it may lower dramatically the impedance between tracks.
Pay attention not to let flux go up to the Meritec contacts)
Measure each connection with an ohm-meter
3- If TSOP40 pines have slightly been bent during the de-soldering process :
Cut a piece of business card paper (0.3mm tick) so that it can be placed under the TSOP40.
Place the piece of business card under the TSOp a place both on the surface of a mirror.
Gently push down on each pin in order to re-align them in the horizontal plan.
Re-align also the pines in the axial plan with fine tweezers.
4- Put the TSOP to be programmed in the Meritec socket using tweezers in the correct direction.
5- Close and lock the Meritec socket.
NEVER INSTALL THE TSOP40 ADAPTER LOADED WITH THE CHIP BEFORE LAUNCHING THE PROGRAM.
ONLY THE POWER LED MUST BE ON, THEN INSTALL THE TSOP ADAPTERS ON THE ZIF32 ADAPTER.

DIP SWITCH settings on Willem board revision 3.1:


The program (revision 98i) does not give the correct settings when EZO TSOP40_A3 adapter is used.
Settings :

SWITCH 1 OFF
SWITCH 2 ON
SWITCH 3 ON
SWITCH 4 OFF
SWITCH 5 ON
SWITCH 6 ON
SWITCH 7 OFF
SWITCH 8 OFF
SWITCH 9 OFF
SWITCH 10 ON
SWITCH 11 ON
SWITCH 12 OFF

OTHER JUMPERS on Willem board revision 3.1:


NORMAL - 29X040 set to 29X040
A18-A19-A20-A21-A22 set to A18
27SF left OPEN
Vpp 12.7, 14, 21V set to 12.7V (Vpp is tied to 5v on Ezo adapter via JP7)
With these settings, the chip is correctly identified as 0x89 Intel and 0x78 28F004T as a Top Boot Block device.
(for Bottom Boot Block Device it should read 0x79 and display E28F004B)
To erase the chip select Erase by Memory Map 8k/block option in the program (0.98i).
This selects the slow erase method which is the one that works OK with that chip.(The fast one doesn't work)
The READ, ERASE or WRITE are very stable.
I'll try next to program AM29LV017 and AM29LV081 chips with a 3.3V Adapter (Vcc on board and adapter) and
the same TSOP combination.
The Willem programmer is really great and flexible ! It helped to revive a quite expensive Compaq Armada M700
completely dead !
Thanks also to EZO for his great work on the simplified programmer and for his adapters.

Happy programming !
Yves (yderyckel@yahoo.com)
http://home.tiscali.be/chipit for smartcard programming ...

MaxLoader Users Guide

1. INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................... 7
PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB INTERFACE
PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC USB INTERFACE MULTI-SOCKETS
PROGRAMMER MODELS FOR PC PARALLEL INTERFACE
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION

7
8
8
8
9

2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION ......................................................................................... 10


INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
HARDWARE INSTALLATION
To Install the software from a CD drive
TO START THE WINDOWS SOFTWARE
TO INSTALL SOFTWARE AND CONNECT TO PC FOR USB PROGRAMMERS
TO INSTALL THE SOFTWARE FOR PARALLEL PORT PROGRAMMERS
To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site
SELECT PRODUCT
TROUBLE SHOOTING IN INSTALLATION

10
10
10
10
10
17
17
18
19

3. FAMILIES OF PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES ................................................................................ 20


NVM : NON VOLATILE MEMORY
ROM : READ ONLY MEMORY
OTP : ONE TIME PROGRAMMABLE ROM
EPROM : ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE ROM
EEPROM : ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE & PROGRAMMABLE ROM
NVM HIERARCHY
SERIAL FLASH EEPROM
SERIAL EEPROM
NON-TYPICAL DEVICES
8-BIT 1-MEGABITS
16-bit 1-Megabits
ERASING AN EPROM

20
20
20
20
20
20
22
22
23
23
23
23
1

MaxLoader Users Guide

PLD
PLD Features
MICROCONTROLLER
ABOUT DEVICE ID AND AUTO SELECT ON EE TOOLS PROGRAMMERS

24
24
25
27

4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE............................................................................. 29


SAFETY NOTE CONVENTIONS
OTHER TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ARE AS FOLLOWS
CHOOSING A RIGHT ADAPTER
Different Device Packages
Different Programming Adapters

29
29
29
30
31

5. QUICK START EXAMPLES............................................................................................................... 32


PROGRAMMING AN EPROM WITH DATA
DUPLICATING AN EPROM FROM A MASTER IC DEVICE

32
34

6. MAXLOADER OPERATIONS............................................................................................................ 35
BASIC MENU SCREEN INFORMATION
Option Information
(Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices)
System Information
Counter
File
Binary Format
Intel HEX Format
Motorola S HEX Format
TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT

ASCII HEX format


JEDEC Standard <PLD devices only>
POF file <Altera EPMxxx devices only>
File / Load
File / Reload
2

35
35
36
36
36
37
38
38
39
40
40
41
43
43
44

MaxLoader Users Guide

File / Save
File/ Load Project
File/ Save Project
Buffer
Buffer / Edit Buffer
Find
Find Next
Fill Buffer
Fill random data
Copy buffer
Fill Buffer
Print buffer
Set editor to view mode
Set editor to edit mode
Set Editor to binary mode
Set editor to 8 bit(byte) Hex
Set editor to 16 bit(word) Hex
Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex
Set default editor mode
Set default Reset Editor
Swap nibble
Swap byte
Swap Word
Swap double word
Jedec editor
Clear
Close
Buffer / Edit UES
Device
Select / Device select by history
Select

44
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
51
52
52
53
53
54
54
55
55
57
57
57
57
58
59

MaxLoader Users Guide

Select / E(E)PROM, FLASH


Select / PLD
Select / Microcontroller
Select / PROM
Select / Auto Select
Select / Device information
Select / Device information / Package details
Test / RAM Test
Device / Change Algorithm
Device / Blank Check
Device / Program
Auto Menu Option
Device / Read
Device / Verify
Device / Data Compare
Device / Erase
Device / Security
Device / Encryption
Device / Option
1 Device/Option /Customer ID

2 Device/Option / Oscillator

3 Device/Option / WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT)

4 Device/Option / POWER-UP TIMER

5 Device/Option / Memory Protect

6 Device/Option / Data Protect

7 Device/Option / Reset Polarity

9 Device/Option / MCLR

10
Device/Option / Memory Parity
12 Device/Option / FLASH Write Enable

13 Device/Option / Background DBG

14 Device/Option / Brownout Voltage

60
60
60
60
61
61
62
62
64
65
66
70
70
71
71
71
71
73
73
73
74
74
74
74
75
75
76
76
76
76
76

MaxLoader Users Guide

15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses

16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses

17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector

18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector

19 Device/Option/Initialize Device

Device / Auto
Test
( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax )
Test / Vector Test
Test / IC Test
Config
Config / Select Product
Config / Config Option
Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading
Config Option / Blank Check Before Programming
Config Option / Verify After Reading
Config Option / verify after programming
Config Option / Byte order swapping
Config Option / Device Insert Test
Config Option / Device ID Check
Config Option / Sound
Config Option / Default Buffer Value
Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum
Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax)
Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer)
USB option / Enable START button
USB option / Good LED off on socket open
USB option / Enable START ALL button
Config Option / Gang Split Select
Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax)
Split
Device Address
File Load

76
76
77
77
77
77
78
78
79
80
81
81
82
82
82
82
84
84
85
85
85
86
87
87
88
88
89
89
90
92
93

MaxLoader Users Guide

File Save
Config Option / Auto Inc
Config / Hardware test
Config / Concurrent(gang) mode
How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ?
How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ?
Config / Language

93
93
94
94
98
101
104

7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT .................................................................... 104


1. REGISTRATION
2. SOFTWARE UPDATES
3. TESTING THE HARDWARE
4. QUICK SELF-DIAGNOSTICS
5. CONTACTING CUSTOMER SUPPORT
6. SERVICE INFORMATION
7. LIMITED ONE-YEAR WARRANTY
8. USEFUL WEB SITE ADDRESSES/ PHONE NUMBERS
9. PROGRAMMING ADAPTER MANUFACTURERS
10. EPROM EMULATOR MANUFACTURERS

104
105
105
105
106
107
108
109
110
110

8. OTHER PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................................... 110


Optional EPROM Emulator

110

9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY................................................................................................... 112


COMPARISON OF NOR AND NAND FLASH TECHNOLOGIES
WHY NAND FLASH
HOW TO PROGRAM NAND FLASH
HOW TO READ NAND FLASH

112
112
113
113

10. GLOSSARY ....................................................................................................................................... 114

MaxLoader Users Guide

1. INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the operation of E.E. Tools programmers.
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax8G(4G) are software,
Maxloader, driven device programmers. The information contained in this
manual has been reviewed for accuracy, clarity, and completeness.
Please report in writing any errors or suggestions to support@eetools.com
E.E. Tools, Inc.
4620 Fortran Drive Suite 102
San Jose, CA 95134 USA.
www.eetools.com
Tel : (408)263-2221
Fax : (408)263-2230
E.E.Tools reserves the right to use and distribute any information supplied
without obligation.

Programmer Models for PC USB Interface

MaxLoader Users Guide

Programmer Models for PC USB Interface Multi-Sockets

Programmer Models for PC parallel Interface

About This Manual


TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) User Guide
explains how to install and run the programming software in your computer.

Chapter 2 contains instructions for installing and running Maxloader.

Chapter 3 describes the most popular programmable devices.

Chapter 4 contains all terms and symbols used in the manual.

Chapter 5 describes basic operating examples of programmers.


8

MaxLoader Users Guide

Chapter 6 is organized by main operating commands and gives detailed


instructions on each command.

Chapter 7 provides troubleshooting information for identifying and


solving problems with programmers. It provides a detailed guide for E.E.Tools
technical support and return material procedures.

Chapter 8 introduces a useful product, EPROM Emulator.

Chapter 9 describes the recent information of NAND Flash

Chapter 10 contains glossary about programmable devices and package


types.
This Manual assumes that you have a working knowledge of your personal
computer and its operating conventions.

General Description
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G /4G are software
driven device programmers that support a wide variety of programmable
devices including: EPROM, EEPROM, Serial PROM, EPLD, PEEL, GAL,
FPGA, and single chip Microcontroller.
TopMax/ChipMax easily connects to the parallel printer port of any IBM PC,
and can operate with a full spectrum of IBM compatibles: PC 386, 486, Pentium,
PS/2, portable (laptop), and clone computers. TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax8G(4G) connects to the USB(2.0) port of any IBM PC, and can operate with a
full spectrum of IBM compatibles.
The great advantage of a programmer is their programming speed and
superior software. All programmers are controlled via a host IBM PC computer.
The operating software has a user-friendly interface that includes window pulldown menus and virtual memory management to deal with very large files.

MaxLoader Users Guide

2. GETTING STARTED / INSTALLATION


Installation Requirements
Maxloader is designed to operate with any 386, 486, Pentium, PS/2, Portable
(notebook), compatibles running WIN 95/98/ ME/NT/2000, and XP. The
computer requires a CD-ROM drive, but a hard disk drive is also recommended.

Hardware Installation
The following section details the procedure for accomplishing the hardware
installation procedure. TopMax / / ChipMax easily connect to any parallel
printer port in your computer and TopMaxII / ChipMax2/ UniMax / ProMax8G(4G) connects to USB 2.0 port in your PC.

To Install the software from a CD drive


Place CD-ROM in the CD-ROM or DVD drive.
Choose a programmer model from the list of files located on the menu
screen. And then The SETUP program will launch the installation procedure.

To Start the windows software


To run the windows software, select your product model shortcut in the
Windows Start Menu / Programs list.
From Configuration Menu, you can choose one of the
TopMax/ChipMax/ChipMax2/TopMaxII/UniMax/ProMax-8G(4G) that you use.

To install software and connect to PC for USB programmers


The software works with Windows OS 98, SE, Me, 2000, And XP.
Follow the steps below for Windows.
1. Make sure a programmer is not connected to your computer, then turn on
your computer.
2. Note: If you see New Hardware Wizard screen and disconnect your
programmer. You cannot install programmer software that way.

10

MaxLoader Users Guide

3. Insert the CD-ROM from factory (EE Tools) in your CD-ROM or DVD
driver.
4. Wait until you see this screen then Click on Device Programmers and choose
a programmer name. The executable file name for the installation is in the CDROM.

11

MaxLoader Users Guide

Note: Customers who want to install the latest software may download the
maxloader file from www.eetools.com

12

MaxLoader Users Guide

5.

Set up maxloader software

6. Install Maxloader and the maxloader icon and USB driver (eetusb.inf and
eetusb.sys files) will be generated in directory C:\program files\EE Tools\.
Follow the steps below for installation for USB 2.0 driver.
7. Connect a USB cable between programmer and your computer and turn the
power switch ON after connecting the power cord in the programmer.
13

MaxLoader Users Guide

Note: In Windows2000, you need to choose specific location when the


Found New Hardware Wizard appears. The USB driver files are generated in
directory C:\program files\EE Tools. Or you can find the USB driver files in
the CD-ROM comes in the product package.

14

MaxLoader Users Guide

8. Click on the Finish button on the Wizard screen and you can confirm the
USB driver in Device Manager in your computer system.

15

MaxLoader Users Guide

Note: For a computer that doesnt installed USB 2.0 controller, you need to
install USB 2.0 driver for the particular product vendor.
9. Execute Maxloader and choose Programmer model
10. Choose your programmer that is ready to be use in your computer.

16

MaxLoader Users Guide

Note: Watch the model name in left-up corner screen and the TopMaxII wont
be ready if DEMO mode appears in the screen. Check the USB cable and
turn on the AC switch in the back side of unit.

To install the Software for parallel port programmers


There are three different addresses for the parallel port. When you select an
address from LPT1, LPT2, LPT3, one of them should be valid without a
communication error message. Turn the AC switch ON before running the
Maxloader software. Make sure you connect the printer (IEEE) cable between
TopMax/ChipMax and your available printer port and lock the shields in each
side of the cable. Be sure that your programmer recognizes your computers
parallel port address when you execute the Maxloader icon. (MEMO mode is
indicated that your programmer has a communication error)
1. Connect print cable between PC and programmer.
2. Connect AC cord to programmer.
3. Turn on AC switch located on the back side of TopMax
4. Install programmer software that comes in a CD-R (or download the latest
software (all-in-one) from www.eetools.com
5. After the Maxloader is installed, you choose a programmer name in the very
first screen menu

To download the software from the www.eetools.com web site


1. Click on Software download button on left at www.eetools.com and
download maxloader software. The file will be saved to your hard disk. The
maxloader can be operated for All-in-one (all programmers-in-one software).
2. Once the download is complete, double-click on the file name to install the
software.

17

MaxLoader Users Guide

NOTE: For the latest software upgrade, remove the old maxloader in
Add/Remove Program of Setting / Control Panel in 2000/XP before
installing a new Maxloader in your PC.

Select Product
After Maxloader is installed, choose a programmer among TopMax, TopMax8G, ChipMax/ChipMax2, TopMaxII, UniMax, and ProMax8G(4G) hardware
in the very first Maxloader screen menu. Or Click on Config / Select product
Make sure to select the right model and turn the switch on. (TopMaxII, ProMax,
TopMax) or connect the AC cord (UniMax, ChipMax/ChipMax2)

18

MaxLoader Users Guide

Trouble Shooting In Installation


A communication error may occur on the screen if the hardware / software are
not correctly installed.
Be sure that the following steps are checked:
Make sure the USB driver is installed after Maxloader software is set up in
PC.
Make sure that the programmer hardware unit is connected to your PC
printer port or USB port directly. A programmer for parallel port interface will
not work with multiple port connectors.
Be sure your printer cable is firmly connected to your computer and the
programmer. Plug in the AC power cord to your programmer and turn on the
switch in the back of the unit before clicking on the Maxloader icon.
NOTE: The Maxloader detects the printer port address when you install the
new software. When you see Cannot find the programming module, go to
CONFIG/PORT and select all three parallel port addresses. If the same error
message continues, contact technical support.

19

MaxLoader Users Guide

3. FAMILIES OF PROGRAMMABLE DEVICES


The devices that are supported on the E.E.Tools, Inc programmers are:
NVM : Non Volatile Memory
ROM : Read Only Memory
OTP : One Time Programmable ROM
EPROM : Erasable Programmable ROM
EEPROM : Electrically Erasable & Programmable ROM

NVM Hierarchy

Flash Memory

Flash Memory Technologies

20

MaxLoader Users Guide

A
0
0
1
1

B
0
1
0
1

C(and)
0
0
0
1

C(nand)
1
1
1
0

A
0
0
1
1

B
0
1
0
1

C(or)
0
1
1
1

C(nor)
1
0
0
0

Performance Comparison

* NAND Flash : High Wright Performance

21

MaxLoader Users Guide

Serial Flash EEPROM


The non-volatile Serial Flash Memory is widely used for code storage and user
settings in cost-sensitive applications such as CD and DVD players, set-topboxes (STB), digital-TV and cameras, graphic cards, printers, PC motherboards
and flat panel displays. These products typically run their operating code from
fast Random Access Memory (RAM), after downloading the code from the
low-cost Serial Flash Memory at power-up. Several semiconductor
manufacturers produce this device family named as 25xxx.

Serial EEPROM
These devices are electrically erasable, but they operate in a series rather than in
parallel.
Xilinx 17xx family
From the Xilinx 17xx series, the RESET Polarity can be changed only on Xilinx
17xxD/L and 17128. On devices with EPROM portion already programmed or
on new blank devices, RESET polarity is HIGH.
The current status of the Reset pin polarity is determined and displayed on the
screen after Reading the device. The polarity of the Reset pin can ONLY be
changed from HIGH to LOW, but not vice versa. To change the polarity, click
on the Option button and check the Reset bit box before programming your
device. To make certain that the RESET Polarity has been changed, read the
device again. On the other serial EEPROM devices (but NOT Xilinx 17xxD/L
& 17128) the RESET polarity is always HIGH and it can not be changed to
LOW.

22

MaxLoader Users Guide

Non-Typical Devices
8-bit 1-Megabits
There are four types of 1 Megabits EPROMS. One set has the A16 and OE lines
swapped. However, this device will still program and verify like normal 1
Megabits. Once this device is placed into the circuit, it will appear as if it has
not been programmed correctly. This is not due to the Maxloader software or
the programmer, but the difference between these 1 Megabits. When selecting a
1 Megabit, it is important to determine which one you have. Here is a list of 1
Megabits and their equivalents:
27010 (normal pin-out -- program as GENERIC or INTEL 27010):
Equivalents: INTEL 27010, HITACHI 27101, TOSHIBA 571000, NEC 271001,
MITSUBISHI 27101, 27301 (non-standard pin-out -- program as HITACHI
27301's):
Equivalents: HITACHI 27301, NEC 271000, MITSUBISHI 27100, TOSHIBA
571001, INTEL 27C100

16-bit 1-Megabits
Any devices with the number 27210, 271024 and the MITSUBISHI 27102.
27011: The 27011 is a 28-pin 1-megabit device that is organized into 8 pages of
16k-bytes. NOTE: The 27512 is 4 pages of 16k-bytes.

Erasing an EPROM
An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. Erasing
an EPROM is done by exposing the EPROM to high-frequency ultraviolet(UV) light waves. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 15-20 minutes, but
may be shorter or longer, depending on the device. If you wish to purchase an
Eraser, call E.E. Tools at (408) 263-2221. When an EPROM is not being erased,
the window may be covered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of
years) an EPROM will start to erase due to the rooms level of fluorescent light.
Direct exposure to sunlight also has the same effect, but happens much more
rapidly

23

MaxLoader Users Guide

PLD
A programmable logic device (PLD) consists of an array of logic gates and flipflops that can be programmed to implement an almost unlimited number of
logic designs. These are programmable logic arrays that can be EEPROM based,
EPROM based, fused link, anti-fuse, or Flash-based technology. They are
programmable by the user to implement logic circuits in order to reduce part
count and turnaround time. PLDs are programmed according to a fuse map,
which is typically contained in a JEDEC file.
NOTE: PLD compiler CUPL EE Tools offers PLD development tool for
engineers who want to generate a JEDEC file for data of PLD devices. Four
different tools are available in www.eetools.com

PLD Features
Many different PLDs are available from the IC manufacturers. PLDs are
fabricated using either bipolar or CMOS Processes. All PLDs are made up of
combinations of AND gates, OR gates, inverters, and flip-flops.
PAL: The PAL is a PLD with a fuse-programmable AND array. The
PALs AND gates connect to OR gates in a fixed pattern.

24

MaxLoader Users Guide

PROM: For many years, the PROM was not classified as a PLD, even

though most of the smaller PROMs (i.e. 32 x 8 organization) were being used as
logic elements. The larger PROMs were still applied in bipolar microprocessor
designs to store microcode instructions. The PROM has an architecture similar
to the PAL, except that the PROMs AND array is fixed while its OR array is
programmable.

FPLA: The field-programmable logic array (FPLA) consists of a

programmable AND array like the PAL, with a programmable OR array like the
PROM. The FPLA is therefore a more general PLD because any product term
may be connected to any output OR gate. Because the entire IC is
programmable, the FPLA can implement some functions which a PAL or
PROM may not be able to implement.

EPLD: Several manufacturers produce PLDs which can be erased and

reprogrammed like EPROMs. These ICs are called erasable programmable


logic devices or EPLDs. Internally, they have the same programmable ANDOR-register structures of the PAL and FPLA.

Microcontroller
These devices are CPU's with on-chip EPROM and RAM. They are typically
40 pins and are UV erasable. They have part numbers such as Intel's
8748,8749,8751,8752 etc. A micro-controller is generally a computer-on-a-chip
with RAM, ROM, and I/O ports. Microcontrollers are usually used for specific
purposes, such as keyboard decoders, printers, clocks, telephones, CD-players,
or any other application that requires a small, on-board computer.
Microcontrollers are used to take the place of in-circuit logic, as it can be less
expensive and take less space. Also, since it is software driven, the device may
be updated very easily. Micro-controllers have the ability to use internal as well
as external RAM. Also, micro-controller data may be encrypted or otherwise

25

MaxLoader Users Guide

secured to prevent copying of the data or program information. Microcontrollers


also have their own instruction set, usually very similar to familiar
Microprocessors (such as the 8080 or 8086). The INTEL MCS-51 family
features up to 64k each of internal and external memory, 32 I/O lines, interrupts,
timers, and bit-addressable RAM. Its instruction set contains 111 instructions.
However, for specific purposes, limited versions of the 51 family are available.
For instance, the Philips 87c751/87c752 families do not allow external RAM to
be used, and have limited I/O channels, etc. However, these devices still allow
for data/program encryption and security levels. They are also less expensive
than the MCS-51 micro-controllers.
See the help selection under MAIN-MENU COMMANDS for Encryption and
Security-bit information.
NOTE: Programming Microchip PIC family
Microchip PIC series are different from other Microcontrollers in that
they have an EPROM area as well as a Configuration Fuse. The
Configuration Fuse in the PIC family is used to setup different
Oscillator types, to set Memory Code Protection and Watchdog timer,
and etc. To program this fuse:
1.

Program the EPROM portion of the device

2.

Click on Option

3.

Make any changes if necessary

4. Click on the Program Configuration Fuses button to program


the fuse information that you want to program
5. Click on the Read Current Configuration Fuses button to read
back the current status of the fuse
6.

Press the Close button


NOTE: In order to obtain more information about programming
the configuration fuse, please contact Microchip technology at
www.microchip.com or refer to their data book.

26

MaxLoader Users Guide

About Device ID and Auto Select on EE Tools programmers


Most of the devices have their own manufacturer and device IDs in each
programmable devices such as E(E)PROM / Flash Memory, PLD, and MCU.
However the old type of devices such as PAL, PROM, or 2816 does not come
with an ID because the IC makers didnt put its ID for the older chip types.
(Auto Select)
As you can see the warning in the Auto Select menu in Maxloader, we can
only guarantee the auto select function for 32-pin or less device in
E(E)PROM / Flash Memory. Since device library in programmer software has
information for these standard device, users can utilize this feature as their
purpose. However, all other devices such as PLD, Serial Memory,
Microcontroller, and FPGA are not able to be recognized by programmer
software automatically . We use this feature as optional device selection menu.
Auto Select command allows you choose an unknown device through device
IDs which were recorded in Maxloader library. Put a device up to 32-pin on
the ZIF socket of programmer and click on Auto Select in Select Device
menu. It will find out a correct device ID and choose a correct device for you.

(To Find a Device ID)


After selecting a certain device from Select Device menu and plug-in a
corresponding device in ZIF socket, you can see the ID(s) when you pressing
Shift and F1 keys in your keyboard.

27

MaxLoader Users Guide

In the software menu, Chip(in socket) MFG(manufacturer) ID and DATA(in


software) ID must be identical if your target device is valid .

28

MaxLoader Users Guide

If it does not, check the socket with your device if you use NON-Standard (DIP)
device or use test other devices in case the first device may be defective. This
ID check must be passed before further operation on your device.

4. TERMS AND SYMBOLS USED IN THE GUIDE


Safety Note Conventions

NOTE assists the user in performing a task. It makes the job more easily
understood.
CAUTION alerts the user that unexpected results or damages to a device
may occur if an instruction is not followed.

Other terms and definitions are as follows


Toolbar
: Clicking on a toolbar button manipulates operations or
commands for Maxloader programmer software.
Bold/Italics : actions items/software functions, i.e. Edit Button, IC Test,
or Change Algorithm.
Device : The IC you are attempting to read, program, or verify.
Buffer : The work area in your computer memory to execute Read, Save,
Program, and Verify. The Buffer size may be from 64K to 32 Megabytes.
NOTE: If the size of a device is bigger than the buffer size in your computer,
Maxloader will use the hard disk space (swapping). For this reason, the
Maxloader software can handle devices up to unlimited size of E(E)PROMs
with your standard memory space ( a minimum of 512KB RAM memory is
required).

Choosing a Right Adapter


Most programming adapters are simple package converters. They allow TSOP,
QFP, SOIC, or PLCC devices to plug into the same devices DIP footprint.
These adapters are available for memory, logic, and Microcontrollers. They can
often be used with many devices from various manufacturers. For devices that
cannot use a generic footprint we have offered adapters to work with specific
programmers.

29

MaxLoader Users Guide

Here is what you need to know to select an appropriate adapter.


1) A part number and manufacturer of your device.
2) A device package. (TSOP, PLCC, DIP, QFP, SOIC, etc.)
(Refer to the following package drawings)
3) Pin numbers in your device.
4) In some cases you need to know your device package dimensions for SOIC,
SSOP, and TSOP packages.

Different Device Packages


DIP

PLCC

TSOP

SOJ

BGA

30

QFP

SOIC

PGA

MaxLoader Users Guide

Different Programming Adapters

PLCC-TO-DIP

TSOP-TO-DIP

QFP-T

QFP-TO-DIP

BGA-TO-DIP

SOIC-TO-PLCC

DIP-TO-PLCC (for Emulator)

31

MaxLoader Users Guide

5. QUICK START EXAMPLES


If you are using a programmer for the first time, this section will help you to
become familiar with the basic operating procedure. This section includes two
examples of device programming with your programmer.

Programming an EPROM with data


We selected an AMD 27C010 EPROM to show you how to program an
EPROM. The 27C010 EPROM needs to be erased (blank) before this
procedure begins.
NOTE: EPROMs have a quartz window that can be erased by exposing the
EPROMs to Ultra-Violet(UV) light. Erasing an EPROM usually takes 10-30
minutes.
1. Click on the Maxloader icon in your desk top menu after installing the
Maxloader.
2. Check the optional configuration before programming begins.
3. Click on the Select button. There are two different ways to select the target
device from the menu: 1) by choosing the device manufacturer type using the
arrow keys or 2) by typing the manufacturer and the device names on NAME
box. Maxloader will display the names of the devices that have the best match
to your input. After selecting the device, the detailed device information box is
provided below the select menu screen.

32

MaxLoader Users Guide

4.Click on the Load to load a file from a floppy or hard disk into the buffer.
Change your file directory by choosing a directory in Look in box. Choose a file
name and type of the file. Make sure that the file type is selected; All Hex
File or Binary file is located in the File of type box.

33

MaxLoader Users Guide

5. Insert the 27C010 device into the ZIF socket. After inserting the part, make
sure that the socket handle is down (close) to secure the chip.
See the illustration below:

6. Click on the highlighted cursor Blank Check.


NOTE: If an EPROM is not erased completely, it will not pass the Blank Check.
If an EPROM is damaged to begin with, it may not pass the blank check,
although it has been erased for a long time in UV eraser.
7. Click on the Program.
CAUTION: Do not touch the device while the BUSY green LED light is on
(programming is in progress).
After programming a device, the part is automatically verified. The Checksum
is calculated and displayed in the OPTION info. In order to verify your work,
read the programmed part again. If this Checksum value matches to that of the
programming checksum, then the 27C010 is programmed successfully.

Duplicating an EPROM from a master IC device


The following is an instruction on duplicating a programmed device. In order
to do so a source device and an erased (blank) target device are necessary.
Source Device: Programmed AMD 27C256
34

MaxLoader Users Guide

Target Device: Erased or blank INTEL 27C256


1. Make sure the Maxloader is displayed without any communication error
(refer to programming section ).
2. Place the AMD 27C256 device into the ZIF socket.
3. Select the manufacturer and part names from the Select menu.
4. Click on the Read button. In order to make sure the device is read properly,
Click on the Verify button.
5. Remove the current chip from the socket and replace it with the erased or
blank Intel 27C256 device. Select the appropriate device from Select menu on
screen.
NOTE: You do not need to change the device information if you use the exact
same chip as the source device.
6. Click on the Blank button.
7. Click on the Program button. The part will be programmed and verified
automatically. If no error messages appear during the Programming or
Verification process, your duplicating work is done successfully. You have a
duplicated Intel 27C256 part from AMD 27C256 chip.

6. MAXLOADER OPERATIONS
This section describes the operation of the software. The Main standard
system-menu is divided into four display areas: Main operation menu screen,
Option Information, System information, and counter.

Basic Menu Screen Information


Option Information

Gang Size : Current socket size when Maxloader is used

Split
: Current world format for split programming

Enc Mode : Enable or Disable Encryption mode for


Microcontrollers

Base Port : Current parallel port address

Check-Sum : Check-Sum number of the data in current buffer


35

MaxLoader Users Guide

H/W Rev
S/W Rev
Serial No

: Hardware revision number for your programmer


: Current Maxloader software revision number
: Serial number of Maxloader hardware

(Additional Option Information For Non PLD Devices)


The following information presents programming information of the selected
device.

Algorithm
: Programming Algorithm

Vccp
: Main Power Supply Voltage

Vpp
: Programming Power Supply Voltage

Tpwp
: Programming Pulse Width

System Information

Device Name
Device Size

Free Disk

Adapter
Pins
File

: The current device number with manufacturer name


: The size of device in HEX value
(Ending Address Starting Address + 1)
: Check the free disk space for a big size E(E)PROM
programming.
: Optional Adapter Name for Non-standard devices
: Number of device pin
: Current working directory path and file name after
loading a file

Counter

36

Devices/HR

: Displays the estimated number of devices that can be


programmed per hour. This feature can only be used
when choosing the Program or Auto selection under
the Device button.
Success : This number indicates the device programmed
successfully.
Failure : This number indicates the number of device
programming errors that occur during a programming cycle.
These could be either Blank Checking, Programming, or

MaxLoader Users Guide

Verification error.
Count : This number indicates all devices executed successfully and
unsuccessfully.
NOTE: This feature is useful for repeat programming on the same device.
You can make an estimate time to perform the programming job and see
the successful and failed devices after finishing the Program or Auto
Repeat programming routine.

NOTE: The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain
a serial number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value.
Start
End

: Start address of memory that contains serialized data


: End address of memory

Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value
User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased
by one to the previous data.

File
Maxloader uses three different file types: BINARY, ALL HEX, and . POF. In
the file types box, a file type can be selected and loaded to the buffer or saved
onto a disk. The default file type is the Binary file. The All HEX files can be
chosen by maneuvering the arrow button. All HEX files include INTEL HEX
(MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S (1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII HEX. OPF
37

MaxLoader Users Guide

(Programmer Object File) is a binary file generated by Altera assembler


(Quartus and MAX+PLUS II). This file should be loaded for Altera MAX or
EPC family devices only.

Binary Format

Binary format does not specify the address or checksum of the file. The file
contains the actual binary data. An example of this format is a DOS executable
file with an .EXE or .COM extension. Binary format is generated for
programmable memory devices. It is recommended to save your EPROM data
as binary format in order to load the file as a standard file format later.

Intel HEX Format

Intel HEX format files are text files that include the file information in
hexadecimal.
1
:
A record mark
23
Byte
Record length in 2 digit HEX, Max 20 (64 in
ASCII)
47
Address
4 digit HEX Field. Most significant byte first
89
Byte
2 digit field record type :
01 End of file
02 Extended address
10 N Data
Data field in HEX digits
N+1 N+2 Check-Sum Two digit HEX Check-Sum character computed
by twos complementing the sum of previous
bytes except the :
INTEL HEX FILE EXAMPLE
:110000000444154414D414E2053332053455249414C73
:00000001FF
The extended address record specifies the index address where data will be
loaded into. The Extended Address will continue to offset data record address
until a new Extended Address record is specified.

38

MaxLoader Users Guide

:02 0000 02 4A29 02


Check Sum
Index address
Record type
Address
Record Length

The Address field is blank because this record is not data.


The record length is '02' for index address (2 Bytes).

NOTE: If the address for the data record is '2B56', the actual address will be
4A290 + 2B56 or 4CDE6(HEX).

Motorola S HEX Format

The Motorola S format file is an ASCII-HEX file.


Position (Byte) Character
Remarks
1
S
Letter S indicates start of record
2
0, 1, 2, 3, or 9
A single character indicates the type of
record.
9: End-of-file
3: 32-bit address data record
2: 24-bit address data record
1: 16-bit address data record
0: Header
3-4
Bytes
Byte COUNT in HEX (multiply by two
for number of characters). This count
includes the address, data, and
Checksum field.
5-X
Bytes
Memory Address for the current record.
X will be:
8 : 16-bit addressing for files less than 64K.
39

MaxLoader Users Guide

10: 24-bit addressing for files greater than 64K.


12: 32-bit addressing for files greater than 64K in
length.
X+1 - N
Bytes
HEX Data (two per byte)
N+1 N+2
Check-Sum
Two digit HEX Check-Sum character
calculated by ones complement
of DATA, ADDRESS and COUNT.
Motorola File Example
S325200000002F0000EA060000EA0B0000EA100000EA160000EA0000A0E11B0000EA210000
EA31

The file offset address is 20000000 , so you should put this value in the
file offset of File Load config option / address menu.

TEKTRONIX HEX FORMAT

The Tektronix HEX format contains ASCII records, expressing bytes


ASCII pairs.
Position
Character
Remarks
1
/
Slash character for start of line
2-5
2Bytes
Address. MSB first load
6-7
Byte
Number of data bytes (not checksums)
8-9
Byte
Check-Sum of ADDRESS and COUNT
by character in HEX (not by byte)
10 - N
Data
Data bytes as ASCII pairs
N+1 - N+2
Byte
Check-Sum of Data by character (not as
bytes)
Tek Hex Example
/00001102444154414D414E2053332053455249414C8F
/01000001

ASCII HEX format


This selection generates an ASCII coded HEX format for either 4-bit or 8-bit
PROMs. Each record contains a four-digit HEX address (16-bit) followed by 16
data elements. A 16-bit checksum is at the end of the file.

40

MaxLoader Users Guide

When this format is selected, the device base address must be specified. This
address represents the lowest address in the device. The file created contains an
entry for each location in this device. ASCII HEX format can be created for
programmable memory devices only.

JEDEC Standard <PLD devices only>

JEDEC (Joint Electronic Device Engineering Council) files are the standard
method for describing PLD fuse patterns and test vectors. JEDEC files contain
fuse data, test vectors, part numbers, and checksums. The checksum of the file
allows you to verify that a given file is intact and has not been unintentionally
modified. JEDEC files normally use the extension (last 3 letters) .JED.
For more information on the JEDEC standard, contact:
Global Engineering Documents Inc. at (800) 854-7179
Electronic Industries Association at (202) 457-4900.
Following is an example of a JEDEC file:
<STX>File for PLD 15S8 Created on 11-SEP-96 5:08PM
2754 memory decode 345-432-123
Seung Park PK Logic corp.
QP20* QF448* QV8*
F0*X0*
L0000111110111111111111111111111*
L0028101111111111111111111111111*
L0056111011111111111111111111111*
L0112010110110111101111111111111*
L0224011110111011101111111111111*
L0336010101110111011111111111111*
V0001000000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0002010000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0003100000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0004110000XXXNXXXHHHLXXN*
V0005111000XXXNXXXHLHHXXN*
V0006111010XXXNXXXHLHHXXN*
41

MaxLoader Users Guide

V0007111100XXXNXXXHHLHXXN*
V0008111110XXXNXXXLHHLXXN*
C124E*<ETX>8646
STX
The fuse map begins with an ASCII STX character (02 HEX)
Design Specification This item is user specific. While no format rules apply,
certain information, such as users name, company, design
date, part designation, revision and device part number,
should be entered. This field is illustrated by an asterisk
(*).
QP
Specifies the number of pins in the devices.
QF
Specifies the number of JEDEC fuses in the devices.
L
The fuse list fields contain the state of all fuse links in the
devices. The starting fuse number follows the L specifying
the field type. The fuse list that follows contains a zero (0)
for each intact link and a one (1) for each blown link. An
L field is generated for each product term in the device.
C
The checksum field contains the 16-bit sum of the link
stated in the 8-bit words.
ETX
The fuse map ends with an ASCII ETX character (03
HEX).
Sum Check
A 16-bit sum of the ASCII values of the characters from
STX to ETX inclusive. The sum check follows the ETX.
NOTE: LOGIC Compilers For PLD Devices: Software is available to help the
engineer develop designs using PLDs. Software tools called logic assemblers or
compilers translate a design file written in high-level language into a fuse
pattern stored in a JEDEC file. JEDEC files are produced by almost all PLD
development softwares and are accepted by the Maxloader programmer. There
are many commercial software packages available to help you design using
PLDs.

42

MaxLoader Users Guide

POF file <Altera EPMxxx devices only>

The programming object file (.pof) for an EPM7128A or EPM7256A device


can be programmed into the EPM7128AE or EPM7256AE device, respectively,
using the MAX+PLUS II software version 9.6 and later or with 3rd party
programming software from EE Tools programmers.
For further question on POF file, contact http://www.altera.com/support/sptindex.html.

File / Load
Data can be loaded into the memory from a device or by opening a data file.
Load fills your buffer memory with the data from storage for viewing or editing.
This command loads the data from the selected file storage into the memory
buffer. In order to the use All HEX File selection, the HEX file must be one
of the file formats supported by the Maxloader(TopMax/Chip Max), such as
Intel HEX(MCS-80/86/386, MOTOROLA S(1-9), Tektronix HEX and ASCII
HEX.

The default selection on File Load menu is in Binary Format. To select any of
the HEX files mentioned above, choose All HEX File by pressing button.
When you have selected the desired file, press the OPEN button to load the file
into the data buffer. If you are programming a PLD, you will want to load a
43

MaxLoader Users Guide

JEDEC file. The procedure is identical to loading a data file, except that the
files in the current directory will have the JED extension. If your selected
device is an Altera MAX family, the file you should load is a POF extension.
The Maxloader uses a RAM buffer to hold data. After loading a file into the
buffer, you can edit the buffer data. If you load a JEDEC file, you may use (the
vector pattern edit) command to view or edit the fuse map and (test/vectors) for
any test vectors that may have been in the JEDEC file.

File / Reload

Data can be reloaded into the memory from the file directories that contains
previously loaded files. Reload remembers your file location and type (Binary
or All Hex) that has been loaded into the buffer.

File / Save
Save the current data in your memory buffer to a disk storage by using one of
the current supported file formats.
Before saving a file, check the buffer and the file address ranges. The contents
of the buffer through the specified range will be written into the new file,
completely erasing any existing file with the same name. Before saving to a
disk, make sure that no file with the same name exists.

44

MaxLoader Users Guide

File/ Load Project


A project file that saved by SAVE PROJECT menu is loaded. The project files
use the extension (last 3 letters) .prj.

File/ Save Project


This feature allows you to create a job description such as engineer name and
other useful information for records.
It is very useful for future use when you set up all possible environments such
as selecting a device, loading a file, and setting other configurations for
programming jobs. A job description can be saved as a file name and the same
project environment will be ready once you load the same project name.
File Name: A file name can be entered with the 3 letter extension .prj.
Author: An engineers name [whom creates this project].
Description: A job explanation that you memorize for your future usage. A
device number, File name, and checksum number can be entered in the note pad.
Other programming menu descriptions, such as configurations can be described.

Buffer
Buffer / Edit Buffer
This command allows the user to examine and modify the contents of the
memory buffer. This section applies to a non-JEDEC file (PROM, EPROM,
EEPROM, and Microcontroller) or to a memory chip. If a PLD is being loaded,
see the (vector pattern edit) section. The data is presented in HEX and ASCII
formats.

Find
This feature allows you to search the data (ASCII and HEX) in the current

45

MaxLoader Users Guide

Asc
HEX
Direction UP

: The data looking for ASCII value.


: The data looking for HEX value.
: The data searching from previous address than the current
location.
Direction DOWN: The data searching from higher address than the current
location.
If you would like to find more data, click on the Find Next button.

Find Next
Press the Find Next button to locate the rest of the data that you entered in the
FIND box. The error Search Pattern not Found will be accursed when you
press this button without entering data in the FIND text box.

Fill Buffer
You can enter a certain character(data) in a certain buffer location.
Buffer Start: Starting address for the data to be filled in buffer.
Buffer End: Ending address for the data to be filled in buffer.
46

MaxLoader Users Guide

Fill Data: Two digits of HEX value to be filled between Start and End buffer.

Fill random data


Once you click this button, a random data stream will be filled in the entire.
This will be useful before programming a device with full buffer data.

47

MaxLoader Users Guide

Copy buffer
Copy certain data between 2 address to other location in the same buffer.

Fill Buffer
Enter certain data between 2 different buffer locations.

48

MaxLoader Users Guide

Print buffer
The current buffer data can be printer in different formats. Also, you can review
buffer data with an editor in an utility software..

Set editor to view mode


This mode allows you not to modify data in the buffer.

49

MaxLoader Users Guide

Set editor to edit mode


This mode allows you to modify data in the buffer.

Set Editor to binary mode


The data in current buffer will be changed as binary mode.

50

MaxLoader Users Guide

Set editor to 8 bit(byte) Hex


The data in current buffer will be changed as 8-bit hex value.

Set editor to 16 bit(word) Hex


The data in current buffer will be changed as 16-bit hex value.

51

MaxLoader Users Guide

Set editor to 32 bit(double word) Hex


The data in current buffer will be changed as 32-bit mode.

Set default editor mode


Make the current buffer mode as same data size as the selected device in the
current operation. It could be 8 or 16-bit depends on the device selection.

52

MaxLoader Users Guide

Set default Reset Editor


The cursor mode will be the first data in address 0..

Swap nibble
Swap each character(nibble) in 8-bit(1 byte) block.

53

MaxLoader Users Guide

Swap byte
Swap each 8-bit(1-byte) data in each 16-bit(4-byte) block.

Swap Word
Swap each 16-bit(2-byte) data in each 32-bit(4-byte) block.

54

MaxLoader Users Guide

Swap double word


Swap each 32-bit(4-byte) data in each 64-bit(8-byte) block.

Jedec editor
This buffer mode allows you to retrieve and modify data for PLD devices.

55

MaxLoader Users Guide

The data can be displayed in two different mode(unused-bit 0 or X, usedbit 1or .)

In the Jedec editor mode, you can still use all features in Buffer Edit Mode.

56

MaxLoader Users Guide

Clear
Pressing this button allows you to fill the buffer with the data located in
Default Buffer Value in Config Option Menu.

Close
Press to exit the HEX Editor.

Buffer / Edit UES


The UES Edit command creates or changes the User's Electronic Signature
(UES) array in GAL device. Each GAL device contains an electronic signature
word consisting of 64 bits of reprogrammable memory. The electronic
signature word can be programmed to contain any identification information
desired by the user. Some uses include pattern identification labels, version
numbers, dates, inventory control information, etc. These features give the user
the ability to view and edit the UES data before programming a GAL device.
When the UES edit command is invoked, an editing data window appears. If
the data fields are empty, you may create a new UES. You can enter the UES
up to eight characters in the HEX or ASCII data area. If you see any data from
the current UES window, it means the UES has been created and that you can
modify the data for a different reason. The UES data is not secured when you
execute the Function / Security command.

Device
This section presents the main operation menu for the target device that is
mounted on the ZIF socket. In order to process the following commands, make
sure that the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and the latch is
down.
NOTE: The Device Information display area presents the device information of
the selected device.

57

MaxLoader Users Guide

Select / Device select by history


Pressing this button allows you to review all devices that have selected
before. You dont have to select the same data again and just select from this
menu.

58

MaxLoader Users Guide

Select

During operation, the first step is usually to select a device. This Select
command enables the user to define the manufacturer and the type of the device
that will be used. After you select a device, you can insert a device into the
programmers device socket and conduct various device operations such as
programming and verifying device data or reading data from the device. The
Select command contains both manual and automatic methods for selecting a
device. If your device is not identified by the Auto Device Select menu, you can
select the device list displayed in the Manufacturer & Device list. Scroll through
the manufacturers and device numbers until you find the manufacturer and
device you are looking for. You can use wildcards to help you zoom on the
device you are looking for.
NOTE: PAL Device Logic Symbols: The logic symbols for each of the
individual PAL device gives a concise functional description of the PAL device

59

MaxLoader Users Guide

logic function. This symbol makes a convenient reference when selecting the
PAL device that best fits a specific application

Select / E(E)PROM, FLASH

All EPROMs (27xxx), EEPROMs (28Cxxx, 29Cxxx), Serial E(E)PROMs


(17xxx, 24xxx, 32xxx, 33xxx, 35xxx, 59xxx), and Flash EPROM (28Fxxx,
29Fxxx, 29LVxxx, 29BVxxx, 29Wxxx, 49Fxxx) of 24/28/32/40/42 and up to
48 pins (1 Mbit, 2Mbit, 4Mbit, 8Mbit,16Mbit, 32Mbit, and up).

Select / PLD

EPLD, EEPLD, FPL, PEEL, GAL, MAX, MACH, PLS, PLD, PLC, PLUS,
EPM, ATFxxx, ATVxxxx, EPxxx, EPCxxx, 5Cxxx, 85Cxxx.

Select / Microcontroller

Intel 87xx, Phillips 87C75x, SGS-Thomson ST62xx, Atmel AT89Cxx, 89Sxx,


89LVxx, Microchip PIC12/16/17, Motorola MC60705xx,
MC68HC711xx/705xx/908xx; Zilog Z86Exx; NEC 8749H.

Select / PROM

AMD 27Sxx, Cypress CY7Cxxx, Fujitsu MB71xx, Fairchild 63Sxx, NS


74Sxxx, Phillips 82Sxxx, WSI 57Cxx.

60

MaxLoader Users Guide

Select / Auto Select


Identify the device that is mounted on the ZIF socket. This feature can only be
applied to Memory and some Microcontroller devices. Clicking the Auto Select
button will enable the programmer to identify the ID on the device and will
select the matching device in the library automatically.
NOTE: If you have a Device not found" message, select the device manually.
If you have old devices or defective devices, TopMax will not be able to
recognize the ID code from your device.

Select / Device information

Pressing this button allows you to review the target device information
before selecting a device.

61

MaxLoader Users Guide

Select / Device information / Package details


Pressing this button allows you to review package information for a target
device before selecting a device.

Test / RAM Test

62

MaxLoader Users Guide

TopMax, TopMaxII provide an additional memory test function. This operation


tests static and dynamic RAM memory chips. The following memories are
tested:
DRAM types tested
- 16K*4, 64K*1, 64K*4, 256K*1, 256K*4, 1M*1
SRAM type tested
- 2K*8, 8K*8, 32K*8, 128K*8
After inserting a memory device into the ZIF socket, select the memory type
from the device select GENERIC RAM selection screen and click on the
RAM test button.in the test menu.
The program will test each address of the memory. A "Defective memory"
message will be displayed with a current address if the memory has a defective
bit. "Good memory" will appear when the test has passed successfully.

63

MaxLoader Users Guide

Device / Change Algorithm

Users are provided with an option of changing the programming parameters of


most devices. Once you select the Change Algorithm option under the
DEVICE menu, the user will be presented with a list of device specific
programming parameters, such as Vccp, Vpp, Read Vcc, Verify Vcc Low,
Verify Vcc High, Pulse Width, Over Pulse Width, Over Pulse Mul, and Retry
number. Each of these parameters can be selected and edited individually by
changing the existing numbers in the parameter box and pressing the close
button. The user will then be prompted to enter the new value for that
parameter.
CAUTION: Please note that before deciding to modify any programming
parameter, the user must consult the manufacturer programming specification
for that device. E.E. Tools will not be responsible for any damages caused by
any unauthorized modified programming parameters. Any changes in
programming parameters are temporary and the original parameters value
will be restored once the operation on that device is complete. However, the
user can store the modified programming parameter for a particular device by
using Macro command.

64

MaxLoader Users Guide

Device / Blank Check


The Blank Check function is used to verify whether or not a device is in an
erased or unprogrammed state.
All EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory) devices should be
checked before programming. EEPROM (Electrical Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory) based parts do not need this command because
EEPROMs are erased automatically before programming.
PLD based parts are checked by verifying all of the fuses that are intact. Any
erased PLDs should pass this test.
NOTE: Erasing EPROMs. In order to clear data in an EPROM, the chip
should be exposed to a short wave UV (Ultra violet) light. Most erasers require
between 5 and 30 minutes erasing an EPROM. Some types of chips take longer
to erase than others. An EPROM based part (a PLD or Microcontroller) with a
security bit feature is designed so that the security address is typically the last
bit to be erased. If the window of a chip is not clear, try cleaning the window
with alcohol or a solvent. Erase chips if the chips are exposed to sunlight and
fluorescent light for months or years; your chips can be erased. You should
cover the window of the programmed chips with an opaque label to make the
data permanent. Some EPROM based parts can't be erased because they do
not have a window. These chips are called one time programmable (OTP)
EPROMs.
An EPROM has a quartz window located on the chip just above the die. An
EPROM is erased by exposing it to high-frequency ultra-violet light waves.
Erasing an EPROM usually takes from 15-20 minutes, but may be shorter or
longer, depending on the device. Many manufacturers make EPROM erasers. If
you wish to purchase an eraser, call E.E.TOOLS at 408-263-2221,
sales@eetools.com. When an EPROM is not being erased, the window may be
covered with an opaque label. Sometimes (over a period of years) an EPROM

65

MaxLoader Users Guide

will start to erase due to the level fluorescent light in the room. Direct exposure
to sunlight also has this effect and happens much more rapidly and commonly.
NOTE: In order to decide if the device is blank, the user should read the target
device. If the buffer is filled with all FFs or 00s, the device is most likely in an
erased or unprogrammed state; otherwise, the device is not erased.
CAUTION: Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured even though they are not blank.

Device / Program
Program command will enable you to place new data from the memory buffer
into the target device. The BUSY GREEN led will be blinking during
programming. Make sure the device is correctly inserted into the ZIF socket and
the latch is down. Then check the buffer device address range before you start.
The values will default to the size of the device.
NOTE: <MOTOROLA MICROCONTROLLERS>
The window of windowed devices must be covered with an opaque label during
operation at all times.
NOTE: For all DEVICE/FUNCTION operations, the ERROR YELLOW LED,
located at the bottom of the ZIF socket is used to indicate the status of the
complete operation. It will turn on if an error has occurred; otherwise it will
remain off.

Memory device

The target device must be blank checked unless the part is electrically erasable.
Although most of EEPROMs and Flash Memory devices have the ERASE
function in the menu, some EEPROMs such as AT28CXXX or AT29CXXX

66

MaxLoader Users Guide

dont have the ERASE function. Note that EEPROMs without the ERASE
function are automatically erased before programming.
Programmable Logic Device operation

After programming is complete, verification should be performed according to


the semiconductor manufacturer's specifications. In order to test vectors, a
vector test should be performed (See vector test under the TEST menu). Finally,
the part may be secured so that its content can no longer be examined or
modified. The security function will not execute if the device fails to verify or
pass the vector test properly.
28C256, 28C010, etc.

28CXXX family devices support Software Data Protection. The user has an
option of either protecting or not protecting the data. This option must be
changed before the start of any programming operation. To change this option,
go to the Option selection under DEVICE/FUNCTION menu and make any
changes accordingly. To obtain more information about Software Data
Protection, please consult the device manufacturers specification.
Microchip PIC devices

Microchip PIC series is different from other Microcontrollers in that they have
an EPROM area as well as a CONFIGURATION FUSE. The configuration
fuse in the PIC family is used to setup Oscillator Type, Memory Code
Protection, Watchdog Timer, or Processor Mode, and etc. After
programming the EPROM portion, change the fuses of the items listed under
Option. Then you must program the configuration option in the Option menu.
Perform the following procedure:
1.
Program the main memory
2.
Click on the OPTION button
3.
Set all of the configuration fuse in OPTION menu
4.
Click on the Program configuration fuses button
You may also read the status of the Configuration Fuse under the OPTION
selection. In order to obtain more information about programming the

67

MaxLoader Users Guide

configuration fuse, contact Microchip technology at 602-786-7200 or consult


the appropriate data book.

Copy from a master chip to a new chip


1.
Select the master device from select menu in Microcontroller.
2.
Put the chip on the ZIF socket.
3.
Click on the Device button and read the chip.
4.
Click on the Option button and read the fuses.
5.
Write down all of the option fuses [the memory protect must be
disabled] in order to copy the information from your master chip.
6.
Place a new chip. It must be the same chip as the master chip.
7.
The buffer still holds your master data and the memory portion.
8.
Click on Option again and set all the fuses that you wrote.
9.
(To change the option, use the arrow button in the selection box.)
10.
In the same Option menu, Click on the program configuration fuses,
read and compare the fuses with your original device.
CAUTION: The PIC16C711, will be used as an OTP (one time programmable)
chip when you erase the secured device. You cannot reuse the chip after erasing
it, even though the PIC16C711 is an erasable device.

MOTOROLA MC68HC908 devices

This device will require a security code in certain memory location when you
program a new device along with data and users must remember the security
data once read(copy)or verify the master device for duplication.

68

MaxLoader Users Guide

Serial EEPROMs
These devices are electrically erasable, but they operate serially rather than
parallel.

Atmel or Xilinx 17xxx


You need to set the POLARITY FUSE with this family via the Option menu.
After programming the main MEMORY, go to the OPTION menu and make
the appropriate change. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the
POLARITY FUSE status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even
on some of the windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L &
17128), the POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device
manufacturer for further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE.
CAUTION: Do not touch or remove a device during an operation when the
BUSY green led is on.

69

MaxLoader Users Guide

Auto Menu Option

Device / Read
Read the data in the source device mounted on the ZIF socket into the buffer for
examination.
The checksum will be displayed on the checksum line. The buffer may be
edited, saved to a disk, or used to duplicate the chip.

CAUTION: Reading the device into the buffer destroys the buffer contents
through the specified range. Make sure everything in the buffer that is needed
has been saved.
PLD test vectors are not stored in a logic device; therefore, they cannot be read.
The test vector buffer will be empty after reading the PLD.

70

MaxLoader Users Guide

NOTE: Devices that have been secured cannot be read properly. Secured chips
may appear all blank, fully programmed, or scrambled.

Device / Verify
Assure that data in the device matches data in the memory buffer. If your
device has the security fuse blown, a verification error is detected. The verify
operation requires that the exact data pattern or file that was used to program
the device be resident in the memory buffer.

Device / Data Compare


Compares the data in device to the data in buffer and saves any difference into
the COMPARE.TXT file. When you have a verify error during the Verify
operation, the Data Compare command will be useful. It will detect a
difference between the device content and the buffer content and will write the
difference into the COMPARE.TXT file under the Maxloader
(TopMax/TopMax 8Gang/ChipMax) directory. You may view the file using
edited utility software.

Device / Erase
This option erases the data in your socket before programming it. This operation
is valid for only limited devices such as EEPROM, Flash Memory, GAL, PEEL
devices. EPROMs that have a window should be erased by UV EPROM erasers
externally (see NOTE Erasing EPROMs in this manual).

Device / Security
Secure a PLD or Microcontroller so that their content can no longer be
examined or modified. Security is confirmed when valid data can no longer be
read or verified against a previously read pattern. To ensure that the security

71

MaxLoader Users Guide

fuse has been blown, the Security operation is preceded by a read of the
device and followed by a verify.
NOTE: Usually, on a UV erasable PLD or a Microcontroller, a secured device
may take longer to erase because the security bit address is designed to erase
last.

NOTE: When you click on OPTION, device security mode and option fuses will
be available for certain manufacture devices. Selecting these options,
programmer will program your device with the checked options continuously. It
is a useful feature for users who like to program devices in volume quantities.
The user does not have to set the fuses or security modes for every
programming.
CAUTION: Some devices, such as Philips P89C52, can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured. Securing a device separates the
programmed data pattern from unauthorized access. This command appears
only when the selected device supports it. Some Microcontrollers and PLDs
can be secured by programming a special address location. The security bit
will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a device is secured, it cannot
be unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the secured device is seen as a
blank chip even though it is not actually blank.

72

MaxLoader Users Guide

Device / Encryption
The encryption table is a feature of the 87C51/87C52 family Microcontroller
devices. The Encryption array of the Microcontroller is initially unprogrammed
(all '1's). In order to protect the code from being easily read by anyone other
than the programmer, this feature allows you to program the encryption table
that is exclusive NORead with the program code data as it is read out. You
have to know its content in order to correctly decode the program code data.
Thereafter you will have to use the same displayed encryption array any time
you need to read back the device.

Device / Option
1 Device/Option /Customer ID

The user can store checksum or other code-identification numbers.

73

MaxLoader Users Guide

2 Device/Option / Oscillator

Most PIC device familys can be operated in four different oscillator modes.
The user can choose one of the following modes from the factory.
LP: Low Power Crystal
XT: Crystal/Resonator
HS: High Speed Crystal/Resonator
RC: Resistor/Capacitor

3 Device/Option / WATCHDOG TIMER (WDT)

WDT is a configuration bit of special features for PIC device familys.


4 Device/Option / POWER-UP TIMER

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


5 Device/Option / Memory Protect

This configuration fuse can be used to protect against spurious EEPROM writes.

74

MaxLoader Users Guide

6 Device/Option / Data Protect

This feature may be enabled or disabled by the user; when shipped from an IC
manufacturer, the Data Protect feature is disabled.
Devices have Software Data Protection (SDP) : Provides software features to
protect nonvolatile data from in advertent writes.
Disable: The SDP command will not protect the entire memory array.
Enable: The SDP command will protect the entire memory array.
Certain Flash device has Sector Protection
Protect All: By pressing the Protect All, no data will be erased or written into
the device. You can still read data from the device. The block(s) doesnt allow
the device to be erased or programmed
Unprotect : The selected block(s) allows the device to be erased or programmed.
Toggle: Change the block status in reverse.
Write Device: The selected block status will be written in the device.
Close: Exit to main menu.
7 Device/Option / Reset Polarity

Reset Polarity (for Xilinx FPGA): The Polarity Fuse is ACTIVE HIGH when
shipped from an IC manufacturer. To change the polarity, click on the Option
button and check on the Reset bit box before programming your device. Once it
changes to ACTIVE LOW, it may not reset the ACTIVE LOW fuse to ACTIVE
HIGH. On OTP (One Time Programmable) devices, the POLARITY FUSE
status cannot be reversed once it has been changed. Even on some of the
windowed 7xxx family devices (excluding Xilinx 17xxD/L & 17128), the
POLARITY FUSE cannot be toggled. Consult the device manufacturer for
further instructions on how to handle the Polarity FUSE.
8 Device/Option / Drown Out

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.

75

MaxLoader Users Guide

9 Device/Option / MCLR

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


10 Device/Option / Memory Parity

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


11 Device/Option / Low Voltage PGM

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


12 Device/Option / FLASH Write Enable

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


13 Device/Option / Background DBG

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


14 Device/Option / Brownout Voltage

This is a special feature for the PIC device family.


NOTE: All the Options above are described in the device manufacturers data
book. Make sure that you understand all configuration features before setting
the configuration fuses.
15 Option Item/Read Current Configuration Fuses

In order to have the information of all configuration fuses, press this button
and you can see all configuration data of the current device. Be sure that you
remember all the fuses information if you want to copy the configuration
information
16 Option Item/Program Current Configuration Fuses

Pressing this button will store all configuration fuses information in the current
device located in the programmer socket.

76

MaxLoader Users Guide

17 Device/Option/Read Status Byte or Boot Vector

In order to have the information of option bits, press this button and you can see
all option lock bit data of the current device. Be sure that you remember all the
fuses information if you want to copy the configuration information.
18 Device/Option/Program Status Byte or Boot Vector

Pressing this button will store all lock bit information in the current device
located in the programmer socket.
19 Device/Option/Initialize Device

Initialize function erases the whole memory array, security lock bits, and status
byte and boot vector into their initial erased state. Press this button before
erasing all 89Cxx family manufactured by Philips.

Device / Auto
Auto command will enable you to do the following command steam
sequentially and it is useful to program a volume quantity devices with the same
data.

77

MaxLoader Users Guide

CAUTION: Some devices such as Philips P98C52 can pass the BLANK
CHECK routine after they are secured without being blank. Securing a device
prevents the programmed data pattern into the device from unauthorized access.
This command appears only when the selected device supports it. Some
Microcontrollers and PLDs can be secured by programming a special address
location. The security bit will be cleared when the device is erased. Once a
device is secured, it cannot be unsecured to read, verify, or duplicate. Also the
secured device is seen as a blank chip even though it is not actually blank.

Test

( These functions are only for TopMax, TopMaxII, UniMax )


Test / Vector Test
Verifies that the PLD (PAL, GAL EPLD, etc.) currently behaves without
having to prototype a circuit. In order to perform test vectors, test vectors
should be in the JEDEC file when the file is loaded. Most PLD development
software will generate valid test vectors automatically. Test vectors may be
examined and modified with Vector Pattern Edit/^F6 command in the buffer
menu screen.
NOTE: Due to hardwares limitation, Vector Test is only implemented on 24pin or less devices.

78

MaxLoader Users Guide

During the vector test, TopMax applies high and low signals to the input pins of
a tested PLD and observes signals at the output pins. The output results are
compared to the expected results from the test vectors. Any difference will
show up as an error message.
The following are valid characters for test vectors:
0
Apply input logic low (Vil) to an input pin
1
Apply input logic high (Vih) to an input pin
C
Clock an input pin (Vil, Vih, Vil)
F
Float pin
N
Power pin or untested output pin
V
VCC pin
X
Don't care: output values are not tested
G
GND pin
K
Clock an inverted input pin (Vih, Vil, Vih)
H
Expected result on output pin is Vih
L
Expected result on output pin is Vil
Z
Test for high impedance
Optional Operation
X value
Optional value of dont care
Vcc
Test Vcc value on Vcc pin
Delay
Test period of each vector in mill-second

Test / IC Test
This operation tests TTL or CMOS logic devices according to the test patterns
stored in the test pattern library.
Click on the Select button and enter a device name and click on Test to begin
the test function. A result message will be displayed after testing.

79

MaxLoader Users Guide

Config

Config / Select Product

After the Maxloader is installed, you can choose one of the programmer listed
in Select product menu.
Make sure that you select a right model and turn on the switch (TopMax /,
TopMaxII, ProMax-4/8G) or connect the AC cord (UniMax,
ChipMax/ChipMax2)

80

MaxLoader Users Guide

Config / Config Option

Config Option / Buffer Clear Before File Loading


When loading a file into the buffer, executing the ENABLE option fills the
buffer with the data that is defined in Default Buffer Value before the file is
loaded into the buffer. When you load a file that is smaller than the current
buffer size, the unfilled buffer will contain the Default Buffer Value so that you
may examine the buffer data more conveniently. DISABLE option keeps the
same data for the unfilled buffer area after Buffer Load command is executed.
NOTE: Buffer Clear means that the current buffer will be filled with the Default
Buffer Value. It can be any data of Hexadecimal values such as FF, 00, or XX

81

MaxLoader Users Guide

Config Option / Blank Check Before Programming


Enabling Blank Check Before Programming verifies whether the device is
erased before programming. Disabling Auto Blank Check Before Programming
prevents this check from occurring.
Config Option / Verify After Reading
Setting the configuration menu to ENABLE will allow you to verify whether
the device data is the same as the data in your current buffer after reading the
source device.
Config Option / verify after programming
Setting the option to ENABLE will allow you to verify whether the device data
is the same as the one in your current buffer after programming a device.
Config Option / Byte order swapping
This option applies only to 16-bit wide (E)EPROMs or Flash Memory. User
data is displayed in the buffer according to the Intel convention with the default
value set at Disable. Enabling this option allows you to use data according to
the Motorola convention during Program and Verify operations under the
Device selection. However, the data in the buffer is not physically swapped.
When enabled, the MSB (Most Significant Byte) of data is located to EVEN
addresses (0,2,4,...) and the LSB(Least Significant Byte) of data is located to
ODD addresses(1,3,5,...).
For example, Byte swap is useful if an assembler creates a file in Intel format,
in which the low byte is read before the high byte, but the file must be in
Motorola format, in which the high byte is read before the low byte.
Sample data file (Motorola EXORmacs Format, Code 87):
S00B00004441544120492F4FF3
S11300000123456789ABCDEF001122334455667750
S9030000FC
Data file opened with format 87 and displayed in the editor (8-bit addressing
mode):
CURSOR AT LOCATION: 00000000 8 BIT ADDRESSING
HEXADECIMAL

82

ASCII

MaxLoader Users Guide

ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F 0123456789ABCDEF
00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#Eg . . 3Duf w
00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Example #1: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even
byte swap = disabled)
The user data is allocated as follows:
Device
MSB
LSB
Device Address:
0 23
01
1 67
45
2 AB
89
3 EF
CD
Sample data file (Motorola EXORmacs Format, Code 87):
S00B00004441544120492F4FF3
S11300000123456789ABCDEF001122334455667750
S9030000FC
Data file opened with format 87 and displayed in the editor (8-bit addressing
mode):
CURSOR AT LOCATION: 00000000 8 BIT ADDRESSING
HEXADECIMAL
ADDRESS -0 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -A -B -C -D -E -F

ASCII
0123456789ABCDEF

00000000 01 23 45 67 89 AB CD EF 00 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 .#E.g. . . 3DUf w


00000010 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Example #2: Programming one 16-bit device (Data word width = 16, Odd/even
byte swap = Enabled)
The user data is allocated as follows
Device
MSB
LSB
Device Address:
0
01
23

83

MaxLoader Users Guide

1
2
3

45
89
CD

67
AB
EF

Config Option / Device Insert Test

When enabled, this test will allow the Maxloader to first examine the physical
position of a device as it is sitting in the programming socket when the user
attempts to take any action to that device. Once it has finished examining, the
Maxloader will prompt the user for corrective steps if needed depending upon
the position of the device. Once you click on Device Insert Test, Maxloader
will display Incorrect device ID if your target device contains ID or if wrong
device is placed inside the socket. You may see the same message if the device
has been secured or if the device ID has been erased. Click on Yes if you
want to ignore the manufacturers device ID and proceed.
Config Option / Device ID Check

Check the device with both manufacturer and device part number before run
any operation for the target device in the socket. If you program an EPROM,

84

MaxLoader Users Guide

you may allow to skip the device ID check routine when the device size and
programming voltage between the EPROM in socket and the part in menu.
Config Option / Sound
A default sound comes when you need attention during programming time such
as blank check error, program error, or Verification error.
Config Option / Default Buffer Value
Fill the buffer value (hexadecimal) with the initial data that you type in this
field. This feature helps the user who wants to have different initial values ('00'
or 'FF') in the buffer. In most case, the default buffer value should be set up as
00 before loading a hex file.
Config Option / 32 Bit Checksum
The digit of Checksum value appears in 4 (hex) numbers as standard checksum
Value.
For 8 digit checksum value, click on the option box 32 Bit check sum and
maxloader display 8 (hex) numbers in the Check sum location.

85

MaxLoader Users Guide

Config Option / Port (TopMax, ChipMax)

A parallel port address can be determined by the Maxloader


(TopMax/ChipMax) software.
Auto
: TopMax/ChipMax will select a valid parallel port as the default
address in your PC.
LPT1
: The parallel port 378 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
LPT2
: The parallel port 3BC in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
LPT3
: The parallel port 278 in HEX will be chosen for TopMax/ChipMax
address.
Port Speed: Because the ISA-bus clock speed is not as fast as that of the CPU,
we designed this option to facilitate the problem caused when using a fast
computer such as Pentium 90/133/166 MHz. The default value is 0. For
computers that have CPU speed of greater or equal to 133 MHz, we recommend

86

MaxLoader Users Guide

that you set the Port Delay to 40. In most cases, this option will help to solve the
communication problem between your PC and TopMax/ChipMax).
NOTE: TopMax / ChipMax power switch should be ON. The Parallel cable is
connected between TopMax / ChipMax and your PC parallel port. Make sure
that the shields on each side of the cable are locked. See section 6
Troubleshooting if you are having difficulty with installation and
communication.

Config Option / USB Option (USB programmer)


USB option / Enable START button
This option allows you to use a start key in USB programmer hardware rather
than PC control software. Once you check in the this option and choose a
master socket, the socket location will be selected as a master socket without
opening the gang program mode(separate menu screen). So you can the
multiple programmer ,ProMax-4G(8G), as a single-socked programmer. We can
see the socket number in either beginning menu screen or gang program mode
menu.

Enabling #4 socket to be master socket


87

MaxLoader Users Guide

USB option / Good LED off on socket open


This option enable the LED light will not blink after done an operation.
So, user can recognize the empty socket is not being effective for any operation.

USB option / Enable START ALL button


This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a
start button for all others. So, customers dont need to press individual button as
an auto programming mode. Customers who want to operate a separate
operation for individual Start Button key must un-checked this option.

88

MaxLoader Users Guide

Enabling any of button to be a Start Key

Config Option / Gang Split Select

Gang (useful only TopMax, ChipMax)


Do not use this option for USB interface programmer.

89

MaxLoader Users Guide

Concurrent Gang Mode must be used in menu for USB multiple socket
programmers.
TopMax-8G(no longer since Jan. 2006) programs multiple E(E)PROMs up to
eight devices at the same time. In order to program multiple E(E)PROMs, users
must use TopMax-8G. TopMax-8G is especially useful when it is necessary
to program many devices with the same data simultaneously. TopMax-8G is
designed for multiple programming and it does not support set programming.
Split
When programming devices for a 16-bit or 32-bit environment, you will need to
split your data onto two or four devices.
NOTE: SPLITTING DATA is different from SETTING DATA. Putting
buffer data into multiple devices is called SET DATA. Maxloader
doesnt support the SET DATA.
EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAMMING TWO 8-BIT EPROM AS FOLLOWS:
Byte $0000
Byte $0001
Byte $0002
Byte $0003
Byte $0000

Byte $0001

Byte $0002

Byte $0003

1. Load a 16-bit file into the buffer.


2. Select the target device from menu.
3. Insert the target device (#1) into the ZIF socket.

90

MaxLoader Users Guide

4. Click on EVEN in Split data menu.


5. Program the device (#1).
6. Remove the device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into the ZIF socket.
7. Click on ODD.
8. Program the second device.
Now, you have two 8-bit EPROMs that have been programmed. The first
EPROM (#1) contains all the even address or low bytes and the second (#2)
device contains all the odd address or high bytes.
EXAMPLE 2: PROGRAMMING FOUR 8-BIT EPROMS AS FOLLOWS:
Byte $0000
Byte $0001
Byte $0002
Byte $0003
Byte $0004
Byte $0005
Byte $0006
Byte $0007

:
Byte $0000

Byte $0001

Byte $0002

Byte $0003

Byte $0004

Byte $0005

Byte $0006

Byte $0007

1. Select the target EPROM.


2. Load the HEX file (32-bit file) into the buffer.
3. Insert the first EPROM (#1) into the socket.
4. Invoke Word 0 in Split Data menu.
5. Program the mounted device.
6. Remove the programmed device (#1) and insert the second device (#2) into
the socket.
7. Follow the same steps as above.

91

MaxLoader Users Guide

After programming the 4th EPROM with Word 3, you will have four 8-bit
programmed EPROMs. The original file (32-bit) is split into four EPROMs that
contain 8-bit data in each device.

Config Option / Address

Device Address
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-Chip Start: Device Starting address for the data to be programmed in buffer.
-Chip End: Device Ending address for the data to be programmed in buffer.
-Buffer Start: Buffer Starting address for the data to be programmed.
-Buffer End: Buffer Ending address for the data to be programmed.
NOTE: Device size for different devices
Device
2716
2732
2764
27128
27256
27010/1024
27020/2048
27040/4096
92

Device Address
0 - 7FF
0 - FFF
0 - 1FFF
0 - 3FFF
0 - FFFF
0 - 1FFFF
0 - 3FFFF
0 7FFFF

MaxLoader Users Guide

File Load
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-File Offset is subtracted from addresses from the file downloaded to the
programmer. For example, if you set File Offset to 1000h, then the downloaded
data minus 1000h would be placed into the buffer at the address specified by the
Buffer Start Address.
-Buffer Start Address is the address in the buffer where you want your
downloaded data to start. For example, if you set Buffer Start Address to 800h,
then the downloaded data only appears in the buffer beginning at address 800h.
File Save
These address will be applied for programming the buffer data.
-Buffer Start: Starting address for data to be saved.
-Buffer End: Ending address for data to be saved.

Config Option / Auto Inc

The feature allows users to program a certain area that might contain a serial
number in the memory device with serialized number by a certain value.
Start : Start address of memory that contains serialized data
End : End address of memory
Inc Value : This value will be added to the previous data value

93

MaxLoader Users Guide

User must click on Auto Increment to program a memory with data increased
by one to the previous data.

Config / Hardware test

A hardware test is designed to assist customers in confirming and diagnosing


problems relating to all programmers. If a hardware defect with a programmer
is suspected, we recommend the users to run this test in order to confirm
whether or not a problem has occurred with the programmer.

Config / Concurrent(gang) mode


Since the technology for USB allows to make a hub port available in a PC, we
introduce multiple socket programmers, ProMax (4G, 8G), also multiple singlesocked programmers can be operated as GANG PROGRAM MODE while the
same model are connected in a USB hub(4 or 8) . With the Start key in USB
programmer,
a
programmer
command
stream
such
as
Erase/Blank/Program/Verify/Security can be executed without PC software
control. You can execute individual socket with corresponding start button or
all socket together with pressing any of START button.

94

MaxLoader Users Guide

Do not touch the device in socket until the operation stream is not finished
(stopped). Each operation in different socket can be displayed with blue color
bar in menu screen.

This pictures illustrates how to set any of Start key enable all 8 sockets.
This option enables any of the START button in multi-site programmer to be a
start button for all others. So, customers dont need to press individual button as
an auto programming mode

95

MaxLoader Users Guide

Enabling any button to be a Start Key


The individual socket with a serial number can be executed once the Start
button is pressed. After check the Enables START ALL button box in Config
option, all 8 sockets will be executed when you click on any of the START
key in Gang program. The START ALL button make all socket If the box is not
checked, individual socket will be executed once the button that contains a
serial number (actual programming socket) is clicked.

96

MaxLoader Users Guide

Wait 10 30 seconds for recognizing all sockets and you can see each sockets
serial number in GANG PROGRAM MODE. There two different features in the
ProMax programmer operations. One feature is that Data in buffer memory can be
simply duplicated into more one socket(duplication). Other feature is splitting
data in buffer to the sockets by same size(set) as much as the same buffer size of
selected 8-bit memory device. It calls Set Programming.
Program Opt.: Program options for automation programming. This operation
steam will be executed once click on individual socket or START ALL button is
clicked.
Serial NO.: Indicates all hardware serial numbers.
STATUS: Indicates executable command status in each programming location.
PASS: Indicates the number of devices passed.
FAIL: Indicates the number of devices failed.
Reset : Set 0 in all of PASS / FAIL number.
Close : Quite the current menu windows.
97

MaxLoader Users Guide

How to program (write) a same file into different sockets ?

If the target device is 8-bit EPROM such as 2764,128,256,512,101, make


the Set Program Mode disabled. The Set Program menu button will not be
appeared for all other(non-8 bit) device selection.

Set Disable in Set Program option which is not available for non-8 bit
EPROM.

98

MaxLoader Users Guide

EXAMPLE 1: PROGRAM 8 OF 27128 EPROMS WITH SAME DATA:


1. Select the target device(27128) and Load a file that should be same size as
the selected Device size. The target devices could be any devices.
2. Click on the Gang Program Mode button.
3. Set Disable for the Set program in menu screen.
4. Insert as many as devices in the open sockets.
5. Click a button with serial number or the START ALL button and a
programming steam will be executed.
This diagram illustrates how to write(program) buffer data(0000-3FFF for
27128 selection) in eight sockets with same data. All devices in 8 sockets must
be identical and data in devices will be same after programming. If a device in a
group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be programmed;
then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as the failed
device

99

MaxLoader Users Guide

The next diagram illustrates how to travel the same buffer data(0000-3FFF
for 27128 selection) to the eight sockets.

Click for individual socket


operation

100

Click for operating all


sockets at once,
concurrent mode

MaxLoader Users Guide

How to program(write) buffer ( blocks) data into different sockets ?


This option is not available for all other devices that are not 8-bit EPROMs. The
menu screen below illustrates that there is no Set Program button because the
device selected DA28F320J5 is not 8-bit EPROM.

Set Enable in Set Program option that make all sockets with an EPROM are
available for Set Programming.

101

MaxLoader Users Guide

NOTE: Who may need the set Programming ?


A file can be fit in an EPROM and the file size becomes bigger than the
EPROM, so the large file should be split into more than one EPROMs. The
ProMax software will split a file up to 8 blocks and program them in different
EPROMs.
If the data blocks in buffer are less than the total socket numbers(4,8), same data
block can be programmed in different sockets. You can assign the same data
block in different socket because there will be empty sockets. So, you can assign
each socket for different data block.

EXAMPLE 2: SET PROGRAM FOR 8 OF 27128 EPROMS:


1. Select the target part 27128 and Load a file that should bigger than the
selected EPROM size(3FFF).
2. Click on the Gang Program Mode button.
3. Set Enable for the Set program menu
4. Assign a block file for each socket as

102

MaxLoader Users Guide

(customer must know the total length of file and how split the buffer data into
the EPROMs in sockets).
5. Click a button with serial number or the START ALL button and a
programming steam will be executed.
As illustrated in the diagram, data is routed to sockets in sequential order(the
first block of data goes to the first socket, the second block to the second, etc.).
If a device in a group failed during programming, the remaining devices will be
programmed; then, a replacement device must be placed in the same socket as
the failed device

103

MaxLoader Users Guide

Config / Language

This option will help customer who want to use the Maxloader menu as native
language with the OS that is installed for own languages.

7. TROUBLE SHOOTING & TECHNICAL SUPPORT


This section provides customer support information such as the return material
authorization policy as well as methods of obtaining E.E.Tools technical
assistance and software updates.
All programmers are designed to require a minimum of technical support for
both hardware and software. Since we make the product in USA, we supply
qualified programmers as trouble-free as possible.

1. Registration
A registration card is located in the user guide manual with the CD-ROM
software .Complete the card and returns it to E.E. Tools to become eligible for:
Customer support, warranty service and technical assistance

104

MaxLoader Users Guide

Notification and special pricing on new products and upgrades


Registration is particularly important if the programmer was purchased from a
dealer, a distributor or through your purchasing department. Why not take a
moment right now to complete the card.

2. Software Updates
Your programmer is designed to be highly flexible and programmable, allowing
it to program a wide variety of chips. Consequently, when a problem does arise,
it can usually be fixed with just a free software update. The new software
updates are available from our WEB page at www.eetools.com
Use the new software if you have any other incorrect programming results.

3. Testing the Hardware


Make sure that your programmer works properly before you call us for
technical assistance. Refer to Hardware Test section in the Config menu.

4. Quick Self-Diagnostics
In order to provide accurate and fast technical assistance, we recommend that
you check the following information before you call our technical support
department. We recommend that you obtain the latest software revision before
calling our support line with a software problem. Eighty percent of our technical
support calls result in asking the user to obtain the latest version of the software.
For USB programmers TopMaxII, UniMax, ChipMax2, you should install
the USB driver in your PC after install PC control software. The USB
driver is in either CD-ROM or C:\Program Files\EE Tools directory.

ProMax-4G will need the USB installation 4 times and ProMax-8G does 8
times. This installation should be done once you install the ProMax in your
PC. Be sure that you use the same USB port for the ProMax programmer ,
otherwise you have to install the USB drivers again for different port. Do
not power Off and ON in 30 seconds and you must wait over 30 seconds

105

MaxLoader Users Guide

once you un-plug an USB cable from PC(USB Hub) and plug-in the same
cable.

Be sure the device selected matches the device being used.


For multi-site programmer usage, make sure all devices are identical.
For a device that uses an adapter, be sure that the adapter is correctly
oriented, seated properly, and the ZIF socket lever is down.
Be sure power cord is securely attached to programmer and power pack to
wall socket.
Be sure that power switch is ON.
Be sure that the parallel cable (IEEE standard, 25 pins and wires) is
correctly and securely attached to the programmer and PC. The connection must
be direct; there cannot be any software keys or locks between the parallel port
and the programmer. Most switch boxes may also cause difficulties.
You may need to change your printer port [even though it is working fine
with your printer] because TopMax/Chip Max communicates with your
computer via the printer port in a bi-directional mode.

5. Contacting Customer Support


E.E.Tools provides telephone technical assistance during normal business hours
(9:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Pacific time).
Please call our Technical Support Department or your local E.E.Tools
distributor while you are at your computer and be prepared to repeat the
sequence of steps leading up to the problem.
Submit your support request to support@eetools.com or you may log-in
www.eetools.com and submit your request .
Have the following information ready when you call or send support
request to support@eetools.com:
- The invoice number for the user who bought programmer from E.E.Tools.
106

MaxLoader Users Guide

- The distributor's name and the purchased date.


- The model & serial number found in the back side of programmer..
- The hardware software revision number from option info location at the
Maxloader software screen.
- Description of problem with error message.
- The exact part number and package type you are working with.
- The adapter part number for non-standard package.

6. Service Information
Before sending a unit in for service, call us at 408-263-2221 to
obtain a Return Authorization Number (RMA). We will not repair
your unit unless an RMA was issued.
Warranty Service: Please return the product in the original package
with proof of purchase to the below address. Clearly state in writing
the performance problem and send any leads, connectors and
accessories that you are using with the device.
Non-Warranty Service: Return the product in the original packaging to the
below address. Clearly state in writing the performance problem and return any
leads, connectors and accessories that you are using with the device. Customers
not on open account must include payment in the form of a money order or
credit card. For the most current repair charges contact the factory before
shipping the product.
Return all merchandise to E.E. Tools, Inc., with pre-paid shipping.
The flat-fee repair charge includes return ground shipping to addresses in North
America only. For overnight shipments and non-North America shipping fees
contact E.E. Tools. Inc.

107

MaxLoader Users Guide

Electronic Engineering Tools, Inc


4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102
San Jose, CA 95134, USA.
Tel : (408)263-2221
Fax : (408)263-2230
www.eetools.com
Include with the instrument your complete return shipping address,
contact name, phone number, and description of problem.

7. Limited One-Year Warranty


E.E. Tools, Inc., warrants to the original purchaser that its product and the
component parts thereof, will be free from defects in workmanship and
materials for a period of one year from the date of purchase.
E.E. Tools, Inc., will, without charge, repair or replace, at its option, defective
products or component parts. Returned products must be accompanied by proof
of the purchase date in the form of a sales receipt.
To obtain warranty coverage in the U.S.A., this product must be
registered by completing and mailing the enclosed warranty card to:
E.E. Tools, Inc., 4620 Fortran Drive, Suite 102, San Jose, CA 95134, USA.
Within fifteen (15) days from proof of purchase
Exclusions: This warranty does not apply in the event of misuse or abuse of
the product or as a result of unauthorized alterations or repairs. It is void if
the serial number is alternated, defeated, or removed.

108

MaxLoader Users Guide

E.E. Tools, Inc. shall not be liable for any consequential damages, including
without limitations to damages resulting from loss of use. Some states do not
allow limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation
or exclusion may not apply to you.
This warranty gives you specific rights and you may have other rights, which
vary from state-to-state.
Model Number:___________________ Date Purchased:______________

8. Useful Web Site Addresses/ Phone Numbers


EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com
ALTERA.............................................www.altera.com
AMD ..............................................www.amd.com
INTEL .............................................. www.intel.com
ATMEL ..............................................www.atmel.com
CYPRESS ...........................................www.cypress.com
DALLAS SEMI. .................................www.dalsemi.com
HITACHI ............................................www.halsp.hitachi.com
INTEL ..............................................www.intel.com
ISSI
..............................................www.issi.com
LATTICE SEMI. ...............................www.latticesemi.com
MITSUBISHI......................................www.mitsubishi.com
MICROCHIP ...................................... www.microchip.com
MOTOROLA......................................www.motorola.com
NATIONAL SEMI. ............................www.national.com
NEC
..............................................www.nec.com
OKI SEMI...........................................www.okisemiconductor.com
PHILIPS SEMI. ..................................www.semiconductors.philips.com
ROHM ..............................................www.rohm.com
SEEQ ..............................................www.seeq.com

109

MaxLoader Users Guide

SILICON STORAGE .........................www.ssti.com


ST MICRO..........................................www.st.com
TEMIC ..............................................www.temic.com
T.I.
..............................................www.ti.com
TOSHIBA ...........................................www.toshiba.com
WAFERSCALE ..................................www.waferscale.com
WINBOND .........................................www.winbond.com
XICOR ..............................................www.xicor.com
XILINX ..............................................www.xilinx.com
ZILOG ..............................................www.zilog.com

9. Programming Adapter Manufacturers


Compass Systems (Asia)..................www.compass21.com
EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com
Emulation Technology........................www.1800adapter.com
Emulation Solutions............................www.adapters.com
Logical System....................................www.logicalsys
Iron Wood ...........................................www.ironwoodelectronics.com

10. EPROM Emulator Manufacturers


EE Tools, Inc. .....................................www.eetools.com
Tech Tools ..........................................www.tech-tools.com

8. OTHER PRODUCTS
Optional EPROM Emulator

.
110

EeRom-8U : Memory Emulation System for R&D and Engineering Part


Communication USB Port (1.1)
Operation Software-Wind98/ME/2000/XP
Low Voltage Supports-3.3V/5V
Target Connect - 32Pin Dip Cable (Standard)
32Pin PLCC POD (Option)

MaxLoader Users Guide

Buffer Memory 8M,12ns SRAM ( 8bit)


Download Speed 1Mbyte/sec
Reset Signal Low/High Software Control
Supports Device E/EPROM : 2764-27080, 2864-28256
Flash Memory : 29512-29040
Size 98x 63x 22 (mm)

The requirement to use the Window graphical application is :

Processor: IBM PC or Compatible Pentium/100 MHz or better.

RAM
: 5MB

DISK
: 5MB

Port
: USB

CD ROM Drive for Installation

OS : Windows 98/ME/2000/XP

Target Systems of EeRom-8U


Your target board required the following memory type for proper emulation
with EeRom-8U. The basic EeRom-8U supports 8Mbits with 45NS Memory.

111

MaxLoader Users Guide

9. ABOUT NAND FLASH MEMORY


Comparison of NOR and NAND Flash technologies

Why NAND Flash


NAND-based flash is a low-cost high-capacity memory technology commonly
used in large data applications such as digital cameras, 3G cell phones, PDAs,
etc. In addition to using this data storage capability, manufacturers have found
it beneficial in many cases to program code into NAND flash devices.

112

MaxLoader Users Guide

Embedded and mobile systems are increasingly using NAND flash for storage
because it has various advantages over other storage technologies. As always
though, life is a compromise and those advantages come with some limitations
that need to be addressed to provide a robust flash file system.
Hard disks are not a viable storage option for many embedded and handheld
systems because they are too big, too fragile and use too much power
Major difference is that NAND is shipped with marked bad blocks on the
device, while NOR chips are shipped defect free. Thus, one expects to
encounter some failures in NAND and should design accordingly.

How to Program NAND Flash


Since all Nand Flash contains BAD Block, NAND Flash developer should
know:

What is the input parameter of ROM writer for supporting the preprogramming in NAND flash memory
Master image file.
The number of NAND flash memory blocks. Refer to NAND flash memory
specification.
The number of Reservoir blocks in NAND flash memory.(Refer to GBBM
specification.)
GBBM (Global Bad Block Management) manages the bad blocks of the whole
NAND flash memory.
Note: Usually, new developers for NAND Flash should have a solution
how to program their devices with NAND Flash semiconductor
engineers and programmer vendors software development engineer.

How to READ NAND Flash


There is no global standard file system for NAND Flash programming for
programmer vendors yet. Hence, customer who understand how to program
113

MaxLoader Users Guide

NAND Flash is not hard to expect that READ(copy) a NAND Flash is very
difficult project unless the customer knows all information how to program the
master NAND Flash. EE Tools support most NAND device with specialized
file systems and simple algorithm with skipping bad blocks. Please contact
support.eetools.com for further assistance. Visit the www.nandflash.com if you
want to know further information about NAND Flash memory.

10. GLOSSARY
BGA
Bipolar PROM
Blank Check
Buffer
Checksum

Compare

Device
Die

DIP
FPGA

114

Ball Grid Array. A surface mount device with solder balls and a high pin
count, similar to PGA.
A fuse-link programmable PROM.
A test performed by a device programmer to ascertain whether a device has
been programmed (partial or total) or is in a virgin state.
Data storage unit directly stored on CPU.
A number that results by adding up every element of a pattern. Typically
either a four or eight digit HEX number, it is a quick way to identify a
pattern, since it is very unlikely that two patterns will have the same
checksum.
Reading a programmable device and displaying any discrepancies from the
desired pattern. Each error is displayed on the screen. This comparison is
slower to perform than a verify on the programmer.
Microchip or Integrated Circuit chip.
The silicon chip that is located within an IC package. It is a small rectangular
flat piece of silicon that has been
fabricated with many transistors to
perform a specific function. It is glued into a plastic or ceramic package and
connected to the external metal interconnect pins of the IC with very small
bonding wires. It can be seen through the window of erasable EPROMs.
Dual Inline Package. An IC package with two rows of through-hole pins,
usually on 0.1 pitch, 0.3 or 0.6 inches apart.
Field Programmable Gate Array. A very complex PLD. The FPGA usually
has an architecture that comprises a large number of simple logic blocks, a

MaxLoader Users Guide

number of input/output pads, and a method to make random connections


between the elements.
Functional Test
A test that is performed following the programming of a PLD. The test
operates the device in its normal operating mode by simulating the inputs
and outputs that the part will experience in normal operation. To perform the
test, the engineer must supply a set of test vectors that describe normal
operation of the device so the device programmer can apply the specified
stimulus and verify that the device is operating as designed. It is important to
perform a functional test on PLDs because, in many cases, the PLD cannot
be fully tested at the factory before programming so a defective PLD may
program correctly but fail the functional test. A properly designed functional
test will verify that the part meets the design specification, ensuring that the
device, the compiler, the programmer, and the engineer have all performed
their respective tasks correctly.
Fuse
A metal connection within a PLD or memory that may be melted during
programming to break the circuit. These links typically carry input signals to
logic gates. Burning all the fuses except those that are required in the desired
circuit forms the desired circuit configuration. Since the fuses cannot be
tested nondestructively, fuse-like programmable devices cannot be 100%
tested at the factory and consequently expected programming yields are
usually 98-99%.
GAL
Generic Array Logic. EEPROM based second generation PAL devices.
Gang Programmer A multiple-socket programmer that requires each device to be placed in a
socket before any can be programmed. See Concurrent Programmer.
HEX file
A human-readable ASCII file that represents any binary data. Each byte in
the binary pattern is represented by two HEX characters (0-9, A-F) so that
any of the 256 possible bytes, which include both control and unprintable
characters, may be printed. The HEX file may also contain address or
checksum information. The pattern represented by the HEX file may be
represented by a binary file or any of the HEX file formats any file format
may contain any pattern. The names of the HEX file formats (Intel, Motorola,

115

MaxLoader Users Guide

I/O
JEDEC

JEDEC file

LCC

Memory device

Microcontroller

116

Tektronix, etc.) indicate who standardized its format and does not indicate
anything about the pattern or the device the pattern is intended for.
Input/ Output.
Joint Electron Device Engineering Council (pronounced JEDeck). A group
organized by the IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) that
has defined a standard file format for PLDs.
A file conforming to a standard format that specifies the configuration and
testing procedure for a PLD. The file is in a human-readable ASCII format
and consists of fields that start with a letter and end with an asterisk. Fields
specify the pattern to program into the part, whether to secure the device, a
set of test vectors to perform a functional test, and checksums to verify the
integrity of the file.
Leadless Chip Carrier. A square ceramic package that has no leads; Instead it
has metal areas that are surface-mount soldered to the target circuit. This
package is usually used only for military and aerospace applications.
Available up to 84 pins.
A Device that contains an array of storage locations. The device has a set of
inputs, called address, which specify which location in the array is being
accessed. A set of input/output pins produce the stored number (pattern)
when the device is read, and accept a new value when the device is written or
programmed. Additionally, there are one or more input pins that select the
operating move (read, write, standby, etc.). Memory devices may be
classified by whether they are volatile or nonvolatile, and whether they may
be erased. The memorys organization refers to its word width and the
number of words in the device.
A device that contains a central processing unit (CPU), memory, and I/O
ports on a single IC. Microcontrollers that contain any form of nonvolatile
memory may be programmed on a device programmer. When connected to a
power supply and external crystal, many of these devices form a complete
microcomputer.

MaxLoader Users Guide

Non-Volatile

Oscillator
OTP

Package
PGA

PLCC

PLD Compiler

The Characteristic of a memory that does not lose its contents when its
power is removed. Non-volatile memory is useful in microcomputer circuits
because it can provide instructions for a CPU as soon as the power is applied,
before secondary devices, such as disk, can be accessed. Non-Volatile
memory includes ROM, EPROM and EEPROM.
A device that produces an alternating output current.
One-time programmable. The characteristic of a memory device that can be
programmed once but cannot be erased. When an EPROM is described as
OTP, this means that its die is erasable when exposed to ultraviolet light, but
because of its package, which is not transparent, it cannot be exposed to light
and thus it cannot be erased.
The plastic or ceramic that protects an IC die and connects it to the target
circuit.
Pin Grid Array. A square, through-hold IC package that has pins located on a
square grid with 0.1000-inch pitch. It may have up to several hundred pins.
Used primarily for military and prototype designs.
Plastic Leaded Chip Carrier, A square plastic package that has J-shaped leads
on four sides. This can be surface mounted or placed in a socket for throughhole use. Available in 20 to 84 pins.
A software package that allows an engineer to specify the functionality of a
PLD through a high-level language or schematic diagram. The software will
convert the design into a JEDEC or other file for the PLD programmer. PLD
compilers are available from numerous IC manufacturers and from third
parties. The packages from IC manufacturers support only one brand of
device and may be free, inexpensive or expensive. The most popular
compiler is PALASM (prices under $200, available from AMD sales offices
and representatives), which supports most of AMDs line of PLDs with an
easy-to-learn high-level language. The compiler that probably offers the
highest level of functionality and flexibility is PLDmaster made by Logical
Devices. It supports most PLDs and offers a sophisticated input language
with full support for state machines and other complex constructs,

117

MaxLoader Users Guide

PQFP
QFP

RAM
ROM

Serial Memory

Socket module
SOIC

Test vector

TQF
TSOP

118

partitioning designs into several PLDs, and graphical input. Their tools run
on PCs and workstations. PLD compilers have simulators that can be used to
test the functionality of your design and validate test vectors that you design
before programming a device.
Plastic Quad Flat Pack. See QFP.
Quad Flat Pack. A square IC package that has surface-mount leads coming
from four sides. It is used for high-density applications, usually over 100
pins. Lead pitch may be 0.025 inches or smaller.
Random Access Memory. A volatile memory device.
Read Only Memory. A non-volatile memory device that cannot be
programmed by the user. It is programmed at the factory through the use of a
mask pattern in the final fabrication steps of the die.
An EPROM or EEPROM that is accessed by shifting in addresses and
shifting out data one bit at a time. Interfaces are available using one, two or
three wires for clock, data in, and data out.
An interchangeable metal chassis that contains a programming socket.
Small Outline Integrated Circuit. A surface-mount IC package that has two
rows of leads on opposite sides. Commonly found in 8 to 32 pin sizes. Leads
are usually 0.050 pitch.
A set of characters that describe the inputs and outputs of a device during a
functional test. There is one character in the vector for each pin on the device.
Numbers represent inputs to be applied to the device (1 for Vih, 0 for Vil).
Letters represent the outputs that must be tested (H for Voh, L for Vol, Z for
high-impedance). During the test, the part will be powered up and each input
will be applied to the device for the first vector. Then, each output will be
applied to the device for the first vector. This process will continue for each
vector and any errors will be reported.
Thin Quad Flat Pack. Similar to QFP but with a lower profile and physically
smaller in length and width.
Thin Small Outline Package. A surface-mount package with fine-pitch leads
(usually 0.025 inch pitch) on two sides. This package is very low profile and

MaxLoader Users Guide

UV Erasable

Verify

Word width

commonly available in a reverse (mirror image) pin out used to simplify


circuit board layout. Usually 32 to 44 pins.
The characteristic of an EPROM that allows it to be erased with exposure to
short wave ultra-violet light. This high-energy light can discharge the
floating-gate transistor cells that store bits in an EPROM. The most common
source of such light is a mercury vapor tube much like an ordinary
fluorescent tube, but without the phosphor that turns the UV light emitted by
the mercury into visible light. The light from ordinary fluorescent lamps or
sunlight generally takes years to erase an EPROM. All UV erasable parts
have a quartz windowed ceramic package that allows exposure with UV light.
Reading a programmable device and comparing its contents to the desired
pattern for that device. This is a go/no-go test it does not report what the
discrepancies are. See also: compare.
The number of output pins that a memory device has. The most common size
for EPROMs is byte wide (8 bits) and word wide, or 16 bits. It can also
refer to the aggregate width of several memory devices used in a set.

119

Programador
PIC JDM PLUS
Programador de PICs, memorias EEPROM I2C y
memorias EEPROM MicroWire (zcalo incorporado)

RdSS
Equipos Electrnicos

Programador PIC JDM PLUS AR Rev1.05 / SC Mayo 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Tabla de contenidos
Caractersticas del Programador PIC JDM PLUS................................................ 3
Listado de dispositivos soportados por el Programador PIC JDM PLUS ................ 3
Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)............................................................................ 4
Zcalo MicroWire ......................................................................................... 4
Cmo colocar los PICs y memorias en los zcalos ............................................ 4
Software de programacin ............................................................................ 6
Configuracin del IC-Prog ............................................................................. 6
Configuracin del WinPic800 ......................................................................... 7
Configuracin del PonyProg2000.................................................................... 7
Configuracin del Win Pic DL4YHF's PIC Programmer for Windows ..................... 7
Circuito para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXX usando el conector ICSP ........... 9
Precauciones y advertencias ....................................................................... 10
Dimensiones ............................................................................................. 11

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 2

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Programador PIC JDM PLUS


Caractersticas del programador PIC JDM PLUS
Soporta PICs de 8, 18, 28 y 40 pines de programacin serial
Soporta Memorias EEPROM I2C
Soporta Memorias MicroWire de las lneas 93C, 59C y 35C (zcalo incluido)
Posee conector de programacin IN-Circuit (ICSP) y led de actividad
Conexin directa a PC a travs del puerto serie
No necesita alimentacin externa, la toma desde el mismo puerto de la PC
Fabricado con materiales de primera calidad
No es compatible con adaptadores USB serie o similares
No soporta dispositivos de programacin paralela
Debido a la baja potencia presente en los puertos de las notebooks puede que
este programador no funcione en ellas

Listado de Memorias y Microcontroladores PIC soportados por el


Programador PIC JDM PLUS

I2C

24C01A, 24C02, 24C04, 24C08, 24C16, 24C32,


24C64, 24C65, 24C128, 24C256, 24C512,
PCF8572, 8572, PCF8582, 8582, PCF8592, 8592,
SDA2506, SDA2516, SDA2526, SDA2546,
SDA2586, SDA3506, SDA3516, SDA3526, 4C016,
GRS-003, GRN-004, GRN-008, GRX-006, GRX-007,
KKZ06F, BAW658049, BAW57452, M8571, X24C01,
24LC21

MicroWire

93C06, 93C14, 93C46, 93C56, 93C57, 93C66,


93C76, 93C86, 59C11, 59C13, 59C22, CAT35C102,
CAT35C104, CAT35C108

Memorias EEPROM

12C
12CE

12CE518, 12CE519, 12CE673, 12CE674

12F

12F629, 12F675

16C

16C433, 16C61, 16C62, 16C62A, 16C62B, 16C63,


16C63A, 16C64, 16C64A, 16C65, 16C65A, 16C65B,
16C66, 16C67, 16C71, 16C72, 16C72A, 16C73,
16C73A, 16C73B, 16C76, 16C77, 16C505, 16C620,
16C620A, 16C621, 16C621A, 16C622, 16C622A,
16C710, 16C711, 16C712, 16C715, 16C716,
16C717, 16C745, 16C765, 16C770, 16C771,
16C773, 16C774, 16C781, 16C782, 16C923,
16C924

Microcontroladores
PIC
16CE

16F

18F

RdSS 2007

12C508, 12C508A, 12C509, 12C509A, 12C671,


12C672

16CE623, 16CE624, 16CE625


16F73, 16F74, 16F76, 16F77, 16F83, 16F84,
16F84A, 16F627, 16F628, 16F630, 16F676,
16F818, 16F819, 16F870, 16F871, 16F872,
16F873, 16F873A, 16F874, 16F874A, 16F876,
16F876A, 16F877, 16F877A
18F242, 18F248, 18F252, 18F258, 18F442,
18F448, 18F452, 18F458, 18F1220, 18F1320,
18F2220, 18F2320, 18F2439, 18F2455, , 18F2539,
18F2550, 18F4220, 18F4320, 18F4439, 18F4455,
18F4539, 18F4550, 18F6620, 18F6720, 18F8620,
18F8720

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 3

Programador PIC JDM PLUS


En caso de utilizar un cable de extensin para conectar el programador a la PC,
este debe ser del tipo apantallado para evitar errores de programacin. El cable es
del tipo DB9 Macho a DB9 Hembra. En caso de querer fabricarlo la configuracin es
pin a pin, uno a uno (Ej.: DB9H pin 1 con DB9M pin1). Este cable se puede
conseguir en cualquier casa de computacin o electrnica.

Conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)


La siguiente figura muestra la descripcin de cada pin del conector IN-Circuit (ICSP)
que se encuentra en la placa (ver precauciones y advertencias):

Zcalo para memorias MicroWire

Cmo colocar los PICs y las memorias en los zcalos


A continuacin se detalla como se colocan en su correcta posicin los PICs y las
memorias en el programador PIC JDM PLUS. Respete las etiquetas de indicacin,
cada tipo de PIC o memoria tiene un lugar determinado en el programador.
Observe el pin 1 correspondiente de cada PIC y memoria. Vea las precauciones y
advertencias.
En un microcontrolador PIC de 8 pines

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 4

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

En un microcontrolador PIC de 18 pines

En un microcontrolador PIC de 28 pines

En un microcontrolador PIC de 40 pines

En una memoria EEPROM I2C de la lnea 24CXX o equivalentes

En una memoria EEPROM MicroWire de las lneas 93CXX, 59CXX, 35CXXX o


equivalentes

El zcalo para memorias del


tipo MicroWire SOLO funciona
con el programa IC-Prog, no lo
hace con PonyProg

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 5

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Software de programacin
Este programador es compatible con cualquier software de programacin que
permita la utilizacin de programadores con conexin a puerto serie del tipo JDM.
A continuacin se detalla la configuracin de los software de programacin ms
usados. Aunque los ms recomendados para utilizar con el programador son el ICProg y el WinPic800 debido a que son los que pueden programar una mayor
cantidad de dispositivos.

Configuracin del IC-Prog


La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuracin bsica para Windows:

Para nuevas versiones o mayor informacin ver http://www.ic-prog.com/

La prxima imagen corresponde a la configuracin extendida para Windows NT,


Windows 2000 y Windows XP. En caso de usar otra versin de Windows la
configuracin puede variar. Si el programador se comporta de forma extraa
pruebe cambiar la interfaz y/o el valor del Retardo I/O. Para usar correctamente el
programador JDM bajo estas versiones de Windows debe habilitar la opcin
Habilitar Driver NT/2000/XP para que el programa cargue los controladores
correspondientes:

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 6

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Configuracin del WinPic800

Para nuevas versiones o mayor informacin ver http://www.winpic800.com/

Configuracin del PonyProg2000

Para nuevas versiones o mayor informacin ver http://www.lancos.com/

Configuracin del WIN PIC de DL4YHF's PIC Programmer for


Windows
La siguiente imagen corresponde a la configuracin de este software de
programacin para Windows, si bien esta diseado para funcionar sobre las
versiones ms recientes de Windows, hay reportes de que en algunos equipos dicho
software presenta errores
al
querer
programar
algunos dispositivos.
Recomendamos utilizar este programador solamente en casos donde sea
indispensable su uso. El tipo de interfaz a utilizar es la del Programador COM84
para puerto serie, y luego hacer una comprobacin de la correcta instalacin de

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 7

Programador PIC JDM PLUS


este programador presionando el botn denominado Inicializar!. Si
comprobacin es correcta ya puede utilizar este programa.

esta

Para nuevas versiones o mayor informacin ver http://www.qsl.net/dl4yhf

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 8

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Circuito auxiliar para memorias 93CXX, 59CXX y 35CXX


usando el conector para conexin In-Circuit (ICSP)
Para realizar este prctico circuito, necesita slo dos componentes listados en el
circuito dado a continuacin.

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 9

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Precauciones y advertencias
Las siguientes aclaraciones deben ser tenidas en cuenta a la hora de utilizar este
programador:
Los PICs son sensibles a las ESD (Descargas electrostticas), asegrese
de haberse descargado usted y su entorno previamente a retirar el chip de
su envoltorio protector.
Verifique que todos los pines se alinean correctamente en el zcalo del
programador y luego inserte el chip cuidadosamente (las patitas del chip
se rompen fcilmente). Si realiza tareas de desarrollo que implican
frecuentes reprogramaciones puede ser buena idea utilizar un zcalo de
transporte para proteger al PIC. Asegrese que el programador se
encuentra correctamente configurado segn las recomendaciones para el
dispositivo a programar.
Tenga cuidado en donde deja apoyado el programador ya que el contacto
con superficies metlicas pueden daar momentnea o permanentemente
al programador y/o puerto de la PC
Nunca coloque o quite un dispositivo del zcalo del programador mientras
se est programando o leyendo, ni cuando el led de actividad est
encendido. Tampoco coloque varios dispositivos a la vez para programar.
Al utilizar el conector IN-Circuit, tenga en cuenta que en el circuito en
donde se encuentra el microcontrolador, el pin de MCLR NO DEBE estar
conectado directamente a VCC ya que el programador eleva la seal de
MCLR hasta los 13V para entrar en modo de programacin. Si no verifica
esto puede daar momentnea o permanentemente al programador y/o
microcontrolador.
No trate de utilizar el programador en dispositivos que no estn en la lista
antes dicha; el uso incorrecto puede ocasionar un dao permanente en el
programador y/o dispositivo.
Esta placa no es apta para el uso en equipos que se utilicen como soportes
de vida, ni ninguna otra actividad que implique la confianza total en este
equipo.
El fabricante del programador NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE por el mal uso
que el usuario pudiera darle, como as tambin por los daos ocasionados
por este en otros equipos a los que estuviese conectado (Ej.: PC,
electrodomsticos, etc.). El usuario adems da fe de que sabe utilizarlo de
acuerdo a lo dicho en esta hoja de datos. La utilizacin del programador
implica la aceptacin de estas pautas.
Ante cualquier duda, por mnima que sea, comunquese con nosotros.

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 10

RdSS 2007

Programador PIC JDM PLUS

Dimensiones
Ancho ................................................................................................ 37 mm
Largo ............................................................................................... 123 mm
Alto ................................................................................................... 14 mm
Peso ......................................................................................................90 g

RdSS 2007

AR Rev1.05 / SC Pgina 11

Engineering Technical Laboratory

Rev 2

ETLUNIPROG control software


Win98/Win2000/WinXP

!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!
!

ODESSA
2002

Microprocessor Tools

1.1 What Youll Need


The following section describe items that are you need to use ETL
programming tools with ETLUNIPROG control software .

Hardware checklist
Programmer boards :
-MC68HC05B6 board *
-MC68HC705B16 board*
-MC68HC05L28 board*
-MC68HC11E9 board*
-MC68HC11PA8 board*
-TMS370Cx5x,Cx6x board*
-TMS375C006 board*

Software checklist
OS -MS-Windows ( Win98, Win2000, WinXP)
Software tool -ETLUNIPROG software

1.2 Installing the ETLUNIPROG software


The ETLUNIPROG software designed for support early ETL programming
tools that arranged the parts of MS-DOS drivers for each separated
board now combine into one software shell.
To install the ETLUNIPROG software, follow these steps:
1) Insert ETL CD into your CD-ROM drive **
2) Close all running application
3) Follow prompts to install software to your hard drive
4) Restart your PC when installation completed (optimal)

1.3 Starting the ETLUNIPROG software


The software used communicating with boards (listed above).
The ETLUNIPROG user interface includes simple controls to activate
boards and modes of operate.
After start the software click left mouse button on Device button and
select a programming board , click on radio button , next step to
set correct device from right side window. So make three simple
steps for Board/IC selection : 1 - Click device button; 2 - Click Board;
3 - Confirm device (See Figure 1) When device is selected you should
see a message , that indicate selected device (according to supported
board) into the message bar. For example MC68HC705B16 board
Already selected (See figure 2).
*NOTE1: Programming boards description see Appendix 1
**NOTE2: Download etluniprog .exe from http://www.etlweb.com

-1-

STEP1
STEP2

STEP3

Figure 1 (Select Device)

Board/IC Selected

All control buttons unlocked and ready to operate


Figure 2 (MC68HC705 board/IC already selected)

Now software ready to operate with selected board/IC. First of all


make sure, that board connected to PC communication port (LPT or
Com) and supply power to a target board. Second, choice menu Tools
and click on Ports Options menu, to configuring your PC ports (See
Figure 4). Change the Port number in case of necessary and set speed
control slide to slow position (P II/III ) or middle position (P IV) ***
**NOTE3: applied to Normal Bi-directional Printer ports. For any other
cases use Port expansion card, it can be connected to any free
ISA or PCI slot of your PC. MC68HC05L28 programming board
must be connected to free Serial Port (Com1-Com4).
-2-

STEP1
STEP2

Figure 4 (Select Port options menu)

Set LPT port number


I/O base addr. $03F8 /LPT1/
I/O base addr. $02F8 /LPT2/
Set LPT port speed control

Set Serial port number


I/O base addr. $0378 /Com1/
I/O base addr. $0278 /Com2/
Figure 5 (Port settings inset)
Now choice Program Sequence or Read Sequence docked panel
according with your needs, then press a button to activate control and
press Start button to begin operation (See Figure 6)

Docked panel read sequence


Activated

Figure 6 (Button activation )


-3-

Figure 7 ( Control buttons)


BUTTONS CONTROL MEANING:
ERASE - this option erases the EEPROM data from the active device.
PROGRAM - this option programs the EEPROM data active device
with the contents of the data array (Dump Editor).
VERIFY - This function compares the EEPROM contents of the active
device with the contents of the data array (Dump Editor). If will display
an error message and the address if it finds and address where the
EEPROM data differs.
LOCK - secured device, when the SEC (NOSEC) bit is changed
(See Motorola microcontrollers documentation), its new value will have
no effect until the next external or power-on reset.
UNLOCK - unsecured device.
READ - This option reads the EEPROM data active device into the data
array (Dump Editor).
ATTENTION: Prior to executing commands, you have to select board/IC as
active and insert this explore device in the socket.
OPERATION CONTROL: See manuals of boards currently using.
Default LEDs meaning:
YELLOW (continuously)- power supply turned ON.
GREEN (flashing) - reading device.
RED (flashing) - writing device.
USE BREAK OPERATION:
For interrupt current operation when operation in progress just deselect
Start button than click it to deactivate control.
ATTENTION: If operation interrupted this may cause to uncontemplated
results.
MISCELLANEOUS COMMANDS:
COPY - This function copies a block in memory to a new address.
UNDO - As you make changes to the memory buffer, the change.s
on the data array highlighted (with RED colour as default). If you choose
this option, it will reverse all changes made to the highlighted areas.
FIND - search the hex or string value.
PASTE - paste the copied data to specified data array.
FILL - This option is used to fill a block of data array with a specified value.
It needs the starting address, the ending address and the value to be
copied into this block of data array.
GO TO ADDRESS: go to specified address.
SELECT ALL - select all data array contents.
-4-

If after start you should see message similar to this one (Figure 8), check
next items:
1) Power supply connection is present on target board?
2) Interface cable (LPT or Serial cable) attached to target board or PC?
3) All contacts in the target socket is good?
4) Explored IC not damaged?

Figure 8 (Error message)


If after start you should see massage about successful, when operation
completed, save data into a file or make changes in the data array
(Dump Editor ) according with your needs. Than click Dump Editor
button:

3 4 5 6
Figure 9 (Common buttons meaning)

Common buttons meaning:


1 - Dump Editor button
2 - Description button
3 - Open file button
4 - Save button
5 - Print button
6 - Help button (This manual)
The data array included all 64K address space (it reserved for future
needs) from $0000 to $FFFF. In case of necessary to load dump
contents less, than specified please use offset control function.
For example: there is a need to load into data array 256 bytes file ,
that started from address $0000 for EEPROM data location of
MC68HC705B16 microcontroller, that located from $0100 to $01FF.
So follow next steps: Click Open file button (see figure 9),
-5-

00000000 38 67 0C 75 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000010 01 12 01 26 01 6A 01 54 01 30 01 74 01 94 00 00
00000020 01 8E 01 54 01 6A 01 98 01 04 01 20 01 30 00 00
00000030 01 94 01 92 00 88 00 56 00 88 01 92 01 92 00 05
00000040 01 8E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 00
00000050 00 00 46 41 3C 39 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000060 55 AA 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000070 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000080 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00000090 8B 74 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000000A0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000000B0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000000C0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
000000D0 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 55 12 34
000000E0 56 57 00 61 6C 70 68 61 00 34 AA 55 5A A5 00 00
000000F0 01 10 92 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 15 0E 15 0E

Figure 10 (Example file)


then disable Load Entry File flag, enter addresses and click OK button
Now you can find loaded data into address array according with
adjusted offset value into required address space.

Figure 11 (Offset settings and result array)

2.0 Maintenance of the ETLUNIPROG software


For any troubles, such as disabling string window, progress bar and etc.,
click Tool panel and chose Reset To Default button then click it to
restore all previous correct settings.
To uninstall the ETLUNIPROG software tool, click Icon My Computer,
then click Control Panel and ADD/REMOVE programs button and
remove it in case of necessary.
-6-

APPENDIX 1:
MC68HC705B16 PROG. BOARD.
Supported devices: MC68HC05B6,
MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16,
MC68HC05B32, MC68HC705B16,
MC68HC705B32, MC68HC05X16,
MC68HC05X32, MC68HC705X16
MC68HC05B6 PROG. BOARD.
Supported devices:MC68HC05B6,
MC68HC05B8, MC68HC05B16,
MC68HC05B32

MC68HC11PA8 PROG. BOARD.


Supported devices: MC68HC11PA8,
MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11KA1,
MC68HC11PA2

MC68HC05L28 PROG. BOARD.


Supported device:
MC68HC05L28

TMS375C006 PROG. BOARD.


Supported devices:
TMS375C006, TMP375C706

TMS370Cx5X PROG. BOARD.


Supported devices:
TMS370C756(A), TMS370C758(A)

-7 -

Errata (MC68HC11PA8 Prog. Board):

When you using MC68HC11PA8 programming board with ETLUNIPROG


software , click ERASE button for every WRITE procedure. (Applied to all
supported devices MC68HC11KA1, MC68HC11KA4, MC68HC11PA8,
MC68HC11P2).
ATTENTION:
DONT click LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for MCUs with modify bootstrap
loader (for example mask set 0D58J, 1D58J) - this modes can damage
CONFIG register data or data will be lost.
After click Start button you should see message similar to this one:

Click No for cancel CONFIG register programming.

-8-

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

16 di 49

BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9

BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina
BOSCH EDC16/EDC16+/ME9
Procedure of recognition and connection to the Bosch EDC16/EDC16+/ME9 ECUs
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the picture.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Di queste 14 piazzole noi utilizzeremo le prime 10 a sinistra.

Of those 14 pads well use the first 10 at left.

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

17 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Saldatura degli strip


Stagnare solo ed esclusivamente il quinto pad partendo da sinistra della prima fila.

Weld exclusively the fifth pad from left of the first line.

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

18 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

19 di 49

Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzola precedentemente
stagnata.
Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins.
Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.

Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated.
Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Ripetere lintera procedura per il secondo strip cercando di mantenere un corretto allineamento.

Repeat the whole procedure for the second strip wanting to maintain a correct alignment

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

20 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo User manual

pag.

21 di 49

Collegamento del connettore


La banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra ( piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.
Connectors connection
The colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo User manual

pag.

22 di 49

DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong

DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline DELPHI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina
Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la .Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins.
Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste. Vedi procedura EDC16
In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute allinterno della flash del Micro
DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong
Procedure of recognition and connection to the DELPHI Ford/Jaguar/Ssangyong
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
The pads are situated in all the DELPHI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the
picture.
Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously stagnated.
Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond between the tracks.
(see EDC16 description )
In this Ecu the Maps are into the Microprocessor Flash Memory

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

23 di 49

Collegare ladattatore DELPHI-MOTOROLA come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the DELPHI-MOTOROLA socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

24 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare
lalimentazione come descritto
PIN 1 GND
PIN 4 +12Vcc
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare lapplicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare
sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.
Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture
PIN 1 GND
PIN 4 +12Vcc
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo User manual

pag.

25 di 49

MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki

MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki


Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline MARELLI nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina
MJET In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute allinterno della flash del Micro
MJET+ M58W016 In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute allinterno della flash M58W016
MARELLI MJET/MJET+ Fiat/Opel/Suzuki
Procedure of recognition and connection to MARELLI MJET Fiat/Opel/Suzuki
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
The pads are situated in all the MARELLI ECU in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the
picture.
MJET In this Ecu the Maps are inside the Microprocessor Flash Memory
MJET+ M58W016 In this Ecu the Maps are inside the M58W016 Flash Memory

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo User manual

MJET

Rimuovere la resistenza da 0 ohm come indicato e saldare i due pettini passo 1.27. (2 X 6 pins )
Non necessario risaldare la resistenza dopo loperazione.

Remove the 0 ohm resistor and weld the two 1.27 pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )
Its not necessary ti put in place again the 0 ohm resistor after the reprogram operations.

MJET+ M58W016

pag.

26 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

27 di 49

Collegare ladattatore MARELLI MJET come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the MARELLI socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

28 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare
lalimentazione come descritto
PIN 1 GND
PIN 50,23 +12Vcc
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare lapplicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare
sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.
Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture
PIN 1 GND
PIN 50,23 +12Vcc
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

29 di 49

SIEMENS 5WS-803(A) Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford


C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP

SIEMENS 5WS Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP
Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Siemens 5WS nella parte inferiore sinistra della centralina.
In questa centralina le mappe sono contenute allinterno della flash del Micro ( solo sid803 con 29bl803)
SIEMENS 5WS Volvo s40v50 2.0d/Ford C.Max 2.0d/ Peugeot 2.0 Hdi FAP
Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WS
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
The pads are situated in all the Siemens 5WS in the left inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the
picture.
In this Ecu the Maps are into the Microprocessor Flash Memory ( only sid803 with 29bl803 )

MPCProg 5xx

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

Manuale operativo User manual

Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27. (2 X 5 pins )

Weld the two 1.27 pins strips.

(2 X 5 pins )

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

30 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

31 di 49

Collegare ladattatore SIEMENS come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the SIEMENS socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

32 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare
lalimentazione come descritto
Connettore 2
PIN G4 +12Vcc
Connettore 3
PIN C3 +12Vcc
PIN H4 GND
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare lapplicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare
sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.
Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture
Connector 2
PIN G4 +12Vcc
Connector 3
PIN C3 +12Vcc
PIN H4 GND
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx

Rev. E del 27/11/2005

Manuale operativo User manual

pag.

33 di 49

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4


Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Siemens 5WK MS45 nella parte centrale sinistra della centralina
Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27. (2 X 5 pins )

SIEMENS 5WK MS45 BMW Z4


Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WK MS45
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.
The pads are situated in all the Siemens 5WK MS45 in the cetral left side of the ECU, like easily we can see from the
picture. Weld the two 1.27 pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

34 di 49

Collegare ladattatore SIEMENS come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the SIEMENS socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

35 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

36 di 49

SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi /


LandRover 2.7D

SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7D


Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
SIEMENS 5WS-201 Jaguar2.7D / Peugeot 2.7 Hdi / LandRover 2.7D
Procedure of recognition and connection to Siemens 5WS-201
Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.

MPCProg 5xx

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

Manuale operativo User manual

Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27. (2 X 5 pins )

Weld the two 1.27 pins strips.

(2 X 5 pins )

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

37 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

38 di 49

Collegare ladattatore SIEMENS come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the SIEMENS socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

39 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare
lalimentazione come descritto
Connettore 3
PIN K4 +12Vcc
PIN K3 +12Vcc
PIN M1 GND
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare lapplicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare
sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.
Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture
Connettor 3
PIN K4 +12Vcc
PIN K3 +12Vcc
PIN M1 GND
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

Bosch ME9.7 Mercedes Benz SLK 350

Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Saldare i due pettini passo 1.27. (2 X 5 pins )

Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.


Weld the two 1.27 pins strips. (2 X 5 pins )

40 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

41 di 49

Collegare ladattatore Marelli come mostrato in figura. Ripettare la posizione del pin n1.
Cavo piatto : la banda colorata che identifica il pin numero uno DEVE essere rivolta verso sinistra
(piazzola uno )
In caso di errore possibile danneggiare irrimediabilmente la centralina.
CMD Technologies non si assume alcuna responsabilit in caso di errato collegamento.

Connect the Marelli socket as showed in the picture. Pay attection at the position of pin n1 .
Flat cable: the colored band that identifies the pin number one should be revolted at left (pad one)
In case of mistake it is possible to damage the ECU.
CMD Technologies it is not taking responsibility in case of wandered connection.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

42 di 49

Alimentazione:
Per questa centralina non necessario collegare il trasformatore al programmatore.
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi ricollegare la centralina al cablaggio della vettura, avviare lapplicativo
MPCProg, girare il quadro su on, cliccare sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo
scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.Nel caso in cui si volesse alimentare al banco la centralina, collegare
lalimentazione come descritto
Connettore Destro
PIN 15 +12Vcc
PIN 16 +12Vcc
PIN 2 GND
Dopo aver effettuato la connessione dei cavi , avviare lapplicativo MPCProg, dare alimentazione al sistema , cliccare
sul tasto +12Von, procedere alla lettura/programmazione. Per lo scollegamento procedere nellordine inverso.
Si raccomanda di utilizzare un alimentatore stabilizzato.

Power supply:
For this ECU it is not necessary to connect the transformer to the programmer. Connect the pins , the adapter and the
MpcProg. Reconnect the ECU to the wiring of the car, start the application MPCProg, turn the dashboard key on, press
+12Von, proceed into read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order. If you
want to reprogram disconnected from the car, connect the power supply wires as showed in picture
PIN 15 +12Vcc
PIN 16 +12Vcc
PIN 2 GND
Start the MPCProg application, give feeding to the system, press the +12Von button , proceed into
read/write/checksum operations. For the disconnection proceed in the inverse order.
It is recommended to use a stabilized local power source.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

43 di 49

BOSCH BMSK BMW MOTORCYCLE

Identificare la zona dove sono poste le piazzole dove andremo a saldare il connettore.
Le piazzole sono situate in tutte le centraline Bosch nella parte inferiore della centralina
Piazzare lo strip a cinque pin in modo corretto e cominciare la saldatura partendo dalla piazzola
precedentemente stagnata.
Stagnare e saldare tutti i pins. Assicurarsi che non vi siano corto-circuiti o palline di stagno tra le piste.

Identify the zone where we will go to bind the connector.


The pads are situated in all the Bosch ECU in the inferior part of the ECU, like easily we can see from the
picture. Place the strip to five pin in correct manner to begin the welding starting from the platform previously
stagnated. Weld all of the pins. Ensure that the pads are not short-circuits themselves or remaining of pond
between the tracks.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

SIEMENS MSV70 BMW

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

44 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

SIEMENS MSS65 BMW

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

45 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Siemens SIM266 Mercedes

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

46 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

SIEMENS PPD1.1 VAG

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

47 di 49

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

48 di 49

CONTRATTO DI LICENZA D'USO E GARANZIA DEL SOFTWARE

LICENZA PER IL PRODOTTO SOFTWARE:


Il Prodotto protetto dalle leggi e dai trattati sulla propriet intellettuale. Il Prodotto viene concesso in licenza d'uso
non esclusiva, con il vincolo della non cessione a terzi, non viene venduto.

1. CONCESSIONE DI LICENZA. In questo articolo del Contratto, sono descritti i diritti generali dell'Utente relativi
all'installazione e all'utilizzo del Prodotto. I diritti di licenza descritti nel presente articolo sono soggetti a tutte le altre
condizioni del presente Contratto.

1.1 Propriet - Divieto di cessione. Il Prodotto e rimane di nostra esclusiva propriet , fatto quindi espresso divieto
all'Utente di venderlo, darlo in licenza o sub-licenza, distribuirlo o cederlo a terzi o comunque di consentirne l'uso da
parte di terzi a titolo oneroso.

1.2 Divieto di modifica. L'Utente si obbliga a proteggere i diritti di propriet, in particolare si obbliga a non modificare,
alterare o aggiungere parti al Prodotto, n ad incorporarlo in tutto od in parte in altri programmi.

2. DESCRIZIONE DI ALTRI DIRITTI E RESTRIZIONI

2.1 Attivazione Software. Al fine di esercitare i propri diritti sul Prodotto Software, quali illustrati nel presente
contratto, l'Utente riceve una chiave di abilitazione hardware. La perdita della stessa pu portare lutente a non poter
pi esercitare diritti sul prodotto.

2.2 Trattamento dei dati personali. La registrazione dei dati avviene sulla base e nel rispetto delle leggi applicabili
sulla tutela delle persone e di altri soggetti rispetto al trattamento dei dati personali.

2.3 Protezione delle Copie. Il Prodotto Software potrebbe contenere una tecnologia di protezione delle copie per
impedire la duplicazione non autorizzata del Prodotto Software oppure potr richiedere il supporto originale per
l'utilizzo del Prodotto Software nel Dispositivo. illegale effettuare copie non autorizzate del Prodotto Software oppure
eludere la tecnologia di protezione delle copie contenuta nel Prodotto Software.

2.4 Restrizioni sulla Decodificazione, sulla Decompilazione e sul Disassemblaggio. E' fatto divieto all'Utente di
decodificare, decompilare o disassemblare il Prodotto,fatto salvo quanto espressamente consentito da disposizioni di
legge vigente in materia.

2.5 Separazione di Componenti. Il Prodotto concesso in licenza come un prodotto unitario. Le sue singole parti
componenti non potranno essere separate per l'utilizzo su pi di un Dispositivo a meno che ci non sia espressamente
autorizzato nel presente Contratto o dalle disposizioni di legge vigente.

2.6 Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti. In alcuni casi, potr fornire all'Utente un servizio supporto tecnico clienti relativo
al Prodotto ("Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti"). L'utilizzo del Servizio Supporto Tecnico Clienti disciplinato dalle
politiche e dai nostri programmi.

2.7 Trasferimento del Software. E' fatto divieto al licenziatario iniziale del Prodotto Software di trasferire il presente
Contratto e il Prodotto Software sia a titolo oneroso che gratuito.

2.8 Durata. Il presente contratto ha una durata indeterminata, dando facolt ad entrambe le parti di recedere in
qualsiasi momento senza obbligo di preavviso.

CMD Technologies s.r.l.

MPCProg 5xx
Manuale operativo User manual

Rev. E del 27/11/2005


pag.

49 di 49

3. DIRITTI SULLA PROPRIET INTELLETTUALE.


3.1 Diritti.
La titolarit e i diritti sulla propriet intellettuale relativi al Prodotto (inclusi, in via esemplificativa, ogni immagine,
fotografia, animazione, video, audio, musica, testo, "applet", ecc. integrati al Prodotto Software), il materiale
stampato accluso e qualsiasi copia del Prodotto, sono di nostra propriet . L'Utente non potr riprodurre il materiale
stampato accluso al Prodotto.
Il Cliente assicurer la Sua piena collaborazione, laddove vi fosse necessit, al fine di far constatare la titolarit dei
nostri diritti , adempiendo a tutti gli eventuali opportuni incombenti per la migliore tutela degli stessi.

4. LIMITAZIONI DI RESPONSABILITA'.
4.1 Limitazione di responsabilit.
NELLA MISURA MASSIMA CONSENTITA DALLA LEGGE IN VIGORE, IN NESSUN CASO SAREMO RESPONSABILI PER GLI
EVENTUALI DANNI SPECIALI, ACCIDENTALI, DIRETTI O INDIRETTI (INCLUSI, SENZA LIMITAZIONI, IL DANNO PER LA
PERDITA O MANCATO GUADAGNO, INTERRUZIONE DELL'ATTIVITA', PERDITA DI INFORMAZIONI O ALTRE PERDITE
ECONOMICHE) DERIVANTI DALL'USO DEL PRODOTTO O DAL SUO MANCATO UTILIZZO OVVERO DALLA FORNITURA O
DALLA MANCATA FORNITURA DEL SERVIZIO DI SUPPORTO TECNICO, ANCHE NEL CASO , LA NOSTRA
RESPONSABILITA' COMPLESSIVA AI SENSI DEL PRESENTE CONTRATTO SARA' LIMITATA ALL'IMPORTO MAGGIORE
TRA QUELLO EFFETTIVAMENTE PAGATO PER IL PRODOTTO E LA SOMMA EQUIVALENTE A CINQUE (5) EURO NELLA
VALUTA LOCALE.

SCHEDA ELIMINAZIONE CODE

AUDI

0 261 204 818

AUDI A6 1.8 TURBO

ELIMINAZIONE TOTALE

Aprire la centralina rimuovendo il coperchio tramite


le 4 viti poste nella parte inferiore.

Localizzare la memoria seriale 24C04 come evidenziato


nella figura accanto.

Riprogrammare la memoria con il file allegato


Rispettare il riferimento al PIN 1 come indicato in
figura per non danneggiare la memoria.

Ultimo aggiornamento : 01/08/02

Proprieta' esclusiva SEA ogni riproduzione totale o parziale e' vietata.

Pagina 1 di 1

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE CLIO 2002->


YAHOO AUTENTIQUE
Vista del immo box:

Desoldar la EEPROM ( 93c66 ) y limpiar la superficie con limpia


contacto ( alcohol isopropilico ) para sacar la capa protectora.

Una vez desoldada la Eeprom colocarla en pinza de lactura y


seleccionar con el pulsador del programador hasta llegar a la
Posicin 93xxxx.
Abrir el programa PONY-PROGRAM
1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9366
2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

La ubicacin de los 6 pares para el CLIO YAHOO ( ESTNDAR )

Mediante las cordenadas indicadas a continuacin se debera armar el


Codigo de 12 digitos del vehiculo.
LECTURA DE DUMP CLIO YAHOO
MANUAL
PONY 93C66

MANUAL

1
2
3
4
5
6

FILA 110
FILA 170
FILA 190
FILA 110
FILA 190
FILA 170

CASILLERO 13
CASILLERO 14
CASILLERO 5
CASILLERO 12
CASILLERO 4
CASILLERO 13

La ubicacin de los 6 pares para el CLIO AUTENTIQUE ( FULL)


FULL
1
2
3
4
5
6

FILA 120
FILA 180
FILA 1A0
FILA 120
FILA 1A0
FILA 180

CASILLERO 7
CASILLERO 10
CASILLERO 7
CASILLERO 6
CASILLERO 6
CASILLERO 9

Immo de derby y otros vehculos, como la eurovan, etc, para leerlo se debe de
escoger con el boton derecho del Vag-pin el immo tipo derby y colocar el Sw de la
parte de abajo hacia el lado derecho, si no marcara error en pinzas.

INMO VOLKSWAGEN
GOL SAVEIRO FOX SURAN SANTANA - QUANTUM
Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:


93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.


Explicacin en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c56


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0018:

0018: 0000 0000 5632 394B 4F53 5441 4C09

0A3D

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

090A

PASARLO A DECIMAL

2314

PIN CODE

Explicacin en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9356


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000030:

30 )

00 00 00 00 56 32 39 48 - 4F 53 54 41 4C 09

0A 3D

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

090A
2314

PASARLO A DECIMAL
PIN CODE

Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpeta


corresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para el
Programa IC-PROG:
KOSTAL
Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en el
Programador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROG
Una vez seleccionada la memoria:
IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo
Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL Kostal
El archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar

Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione:


COMANDO / Programar todo.
Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estara
Virginizado

INMO VOLKSWAGEN
POLO VALEO / CADDY VALEO / TRANSPORTER 2001->
Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:


24xxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.


Explicacin en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0060:

0060: 00FF 00FF 0000 0003 0024 005F 00D8 000C


Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

0CD8
3288

PASARLO A DECIMAL
PIN CODE

Explicacin en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / 12C Bus 8bit eeprom / 2404


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 00001B0:


0001B0

FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF - FF FF 00 03 24 5F D8

0C

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

0CD8
3288

PASARLO A DECIMAL
PIN CODE

INMO VOLKSWAGEN
GOL SAVEIRO FOX SURAN SANTANA - QUANTUM
Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:


93xxxx en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.


Explicacin en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / MICROWIRE Eeprom / 93c56


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0010:

0010: A4E9 5201 22F2 56C3 E9C6 DA00 871D 0061


Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

22C3

PASARLO A DECIMAL

8899

PIN CODE

Explicacin en el software PONY-PROG

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9356


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 000020:


000020) A4 E9 52 01 22 F2 56 C3 E9 C6 DA 00 87 1D 00 61

Con la calculadora Cientifica pasar de formato HEX a DEC:

22C3

PASARLO A DECIMAL

8899

PIN CODE

Los ARCHIVOS que se encuentra dentro de esta carpeta


corresponden A un DUMPS de IMMOs virginizados para el
Programa IC-PROG:

MEGAMOS / DELPHI nafta


MEGAMOS / DELPHI diesel
Para Virginizar el IMMO se debe seleccionar la memoria 93xxxx en el
Programador y hacer lo mismo en el software IC-PROG
Una vez seleccionada la memoria:
IR A ARCHIVO / Abrir archivo
Y buscar dentro del CD / Carpetas Varias / VW GOL Megamos
delphi. ,el archivo que corresponda al IMMO que se quiera Virginizar

Una vez abierto, conecte el IMMO al programador y seleccione:


COMANDO / Programar todo.
Ahora el IMMO tendra un nuevo numero de PIN-CODE y estara
Virginizado

INMOVILISADORES INFORMACION
1} LOS TIPO A SON LOS QUE TIENEN LA MEMORIA LEJOS DEL FILTRO Y
SE PINSAN CON EL CAIMAN LOS 2 PINES LATERALES (A MANERA QUE
QUEDEN UNIDOS) DE LOS 3 PINES QUE SE ENCUENTRAN JUNTOS EN LA
PARTE DE TRASERA DE LA TABLETA

2} LOS TIPO B TIENEN LA MEMORIA DETRS DEL FILTRO

3) LOS DE DERBI TIENEN LA MEMORIA EN

POSICION DE COLORES PARA LA PINZA DE POINTER. LA MARCA EST


DEL LADO DEL COLOR VERDE Y DEL ROJO

3} LAS REFERENCIAS
PARA PINSAR LAS
MEMORIA SON:
LAS 2 MARCAS QUE TIENE LA PINSA VAN HACIA EL PUNTO QUE TIENE
LA MEMORIA O LEYENDO EL GRABADO DE LAS LETRAS LAS MARCAS
VAN A LA IZQUIERDA
NO ENCENDER ANTES DE PINZAR Y APAGAR ANTES DE DESPINZAR O LA
MEMORIA SE BORRAR
OJO:
<<ALGUN PROCEDIMIENTO MAL HECHO Y NO HABRA
RETROCESO CAUSAR DAOS AL EQUIPO>>

4} ATOS, MEMORIA 95040 PARA ABRIR BUFER SE PONE 25XX POSICIONES


DEL NUMERO
10--42 37 92
20--42 37 92
30--42 37 92

5} PLATINA, RENAULT MEMORIA 93C66 POSICIONES DE LOS NMEROS


LEER A (8 o 16) BITS
10C
10D
10E
10F
110
111

117
116
119
118
10B
10A

10D
17C
195
10A
192
17D

10C
17E
194
10B
193
17C

127
188
1A7
124
1A4
189

EL CABLE CAF A LA REFERENCIA PINTADA DE AMARILLO


6} NMERO DEL ESCANER:
T CODE 635434

INSTRUCCIONES PARA LA LECTURA


DEL DUMP DEL DECODIFICADOR
RENAULT
CLIO 2 1998 / 2001 - KANGOO - MASTER
TWINGO 2000->
MAGANE 4 PTAS 2004 ->
Vista del decodificador

Abrir la caja del decodificador con cuidado de no


lastimar la plaqueta

Se debe desoldar la memoria 93c46 de la plaqueta y colocar en la


pinza de lectura.
Abrir el programa PONY PROG y seleccionar la la siguiente
memoria:

Dispositivo / microwire16 Eeprom / 9346

Realizar la lectura y guardar el archivo con la Extensin .BIN

Una vez Guardado, enviar el archivo por correo


electronico a:
cristalesrepetto@opcionestelmex.com.ar
y le sera devuelto los 32 digitos del transponder de ese
decodificador.

INMO PEUGEOT 106 / CITROEN SAXO


PARTNER HASTA 2000 / BERLINGO HASTA 2000
Vista externa del IMMO box.

Vista interna del IMMO box

Colocar la pinza en la eeprom indicada, seleccionar la memoria:


93XXXX en el Programador y abrir el software:

Una vez conectado el programador abrir el programa.


Explicacin en el: IC-PROG:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / Microwire Eeprom / 93c57


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra al FINAL de la LINEA 0008:


0008: 009F 9F03 0303 0350 5055 5558 5838 3819 Y.. PUX8 .

Peugeot 206
Procedimiento para REMAPEAR la
computadora de injeccion
Peugeot 206 nafta modelo 1997 2002 1.6
Computadora BOSH MP 7.2

1 Saque los tornillos y la tapa de la computadora


2 Sacar la plaqueta y ubicar la Eeprom 24c02 donde se aloja
El codigo a Remapear

Para poder REMAPEAR la Eeprom se debe


DESOLDAR la memoria 24c02
Conectar la memoria a la Pinza de lectura y abrir
El programa IC Prog / seleccionar:

1 Dispositivo / IC Eeprom / 24c02


2 Ir a Archivo / Abrir Archivo y buscar
dentro de la carpeta PEUGEOT 206 el Archivo
peugeot 206 bosh mp72 remapeo.hex
3 Una vez cargado en la pantalla el DUMP
Presionar el boton de grabar:

Una vez grabada la Eeprom, soldar la memoria


en la plaqueta, armar la computadora y
reconectar la ECU al auto ( no es necesario cortar
ningun cable ni pin )
El auto dara arranque sin necesidad de
transponder y no perdera la informacin si se
desconecta la bateria.

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE ALARMA


GM VECTRA 1998->
Vista de la central de ALARMA:

Ubicacin de la Eeprom ( 93lc46 ) donde se aloja el codigo

Antes de leer la Memoria, se debe puentear el cristal, como se indica


En el siguiente grafico.

La lectura del pin code se debe realizar mediante el:


PONY PROGRAM

1 IR A DISPOSITIVO / MICROWIRE16 eeprom / 9346


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE.

Ejemplo:

Si la lectura de la Eeprom se hizo de forma correcta, en la columna


Final ( numeros color ROSADO ) se debera leer el numero Completo
De chasis del vehiculo:

El codigo en este Ejemplo se encuentra en la LINEA 000070:

7155

PIN CODE

LECTURA DE PIN CODE DE GM BLAZER / S-10


Vista del immo box:

1 IR A AJUSTES / DISPOSITIVO / IC Eeprom / 24c04


2 IR A COMANDO / Leer todo o presionar el BOTON VERDE de
De la barra de herramientas.

Luego de la lectura se obtiene el DUMP ( mapa de caracteres )


Donde buscaremos el PIN-CODE en formato Hexagecimal y
deberemos pasarlo a sistema Decimal para obtener EL PIN.
Ejemplo:

El codigo se encuentra en la LINEA 0138:

0138: 00CA 0013 00FF 00FF 00F7 0060 0007 0002

6007

PIN CODE

Untitled Document

BACK

Airbag
When an explosion occurs in an airbag or the SRS light is turned on accidentally, commonly the airbag controller should be
replaced since the traditional tools cannot clean out the trouble code. Actually, the controller can be used normally again
after cleaning the trouble code under the condition that there is no damage to the controllers hardware.
With Tech2 this trouble codes like this:

With PINReader this trouble codes like this:

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (1 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

Untitled Document

After Clear Crash Codes with PINReader :

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (2 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

Untitled Document

file:///D|/Nueva carpeta/Nueva carpeta (2)/Nueva carpeta (2)/Untitled Document.htm (3 de 3)29/01/2008 8:14:49

EURO LECTOR II
VERSION 1.2

SI SU PROBLEMA ES LEER UN CODIGO


CON EL EURO LECTOR SOLO ES UN JUEGO

MANUAL

POINTER
SEGURO

TORNILLOS
SEGURO

TAPA DE FUSIBLES

TORNILLOS

LUPO
SEGURO

Seleccione opcin Megamos

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO

PUENTE SOLO
PARA
MEGAMOS

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo daado.

Pointer Megamos

Lectura exitosa.

Seleccione opcin Kostal

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO

Pointer Kostal

NOTA:
La tableta puede tener un bao de silicn
donde puede experimentar un mal
contacto con la pinza, usted puede
retirarlo sin daar la tableta y la memoria
con un limpiador especial en aerosol y
ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez
que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla
hasta retirar la capa de silicn.

DERBY Y DERBY VAN

TORNILLOS

Seleccione opcin Derby

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo daado.

Lectura exitosa.

SHARAN
TORNILLOS
TORX 20
LADO IZQ
Y
DER

JALE HACIA A USTED.

TORNILLOS

VISTA DE LOS CONECTORES.


!DESCONECTARLOS

TORNILLOS
DEL INMO.

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO
DE LA PINZA

Seleccione opcin Derby

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo daado.

Lectura exitosa.

ATOS

TORNILLOS

VISTA LADO DER.


DEL COPILOTO

Seleccione opcin Atos

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo daado.

Lectura exitosa.

NOTA:
La tableta puede tener un bao de silicn donde puede experimentar un mal
contacto con la pinza, usted puede retirarlo sin daar la tableta y la memoria
con un limpiador especial en aerosol y ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez
que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla hasta retirar la capa de silicn.

PLATINA Y CLIO II (NO SPORT 2 PUERTAS)


VISTA IZQ ARRIBA DE LOS PEDALES
SOLO PRESIONAR PARA RETIRAR

Seleccione opcin Platina o Clio II

LADO ROJO
IZQUIERDO

Lectura con error, pinza o un archivo daado.

Lectura exitosa.

NOTA:
La tableta puede tener un bao de silicn donde puede experimentar un mal
contacto con la pinza, usted puede retirarlo sin daar la tableta y la memoria
con un limpiador especial en aerosol y ayudado con un cepillo dental, una vez
que usted aplico el aerosol usted cepilla hasta retirar la capa de silicn.

CHRYSLER TIPO 1 (1998-2000)


Desoldar para poder
retirar la tableta y as
voltear la tableta y ver
la memoria.

ANTENA

Memoria
Pinza lado
Rojo Izq.

1.Quite la antena que esta al rededor de la columna del encendido.


2.Retire la tapa de la antena, ayudado con un desarmador plano
pequeo, para poder quitar los seguros de la tapa.
3.Usted necesita desoldar los conectores que sostienen la antena y
l a t a b l e t a . ( N e c e s i t a u s a r u n e x t ra c t o r d e s o l d a d u ra )
4. Una vez estos desoldados, usted puede retirar la tableta del plstico.
5.De

vuelta

6.Ponga

la

pinza

la
en

tableta
la

usted

memoria,

lado

vera
rojo

una
a

la

memoria.
izquierda.

7.Seleccione con el Euro Lector II versin 1.3 Chrysler tipo 1.


8.Usted vera en la pantalla del Euro el VIN de 17 dgitos y el pin 4 dgitos.
300M 99-00, BREEZE 99-00, CHEROKKE 99-00, CIRRUS 99-00, CONCORDE 99-00
GRAND CHEROKEE 99-00,INTREPID 98-00, LHS 99-00, NEON 2000, SEBRING 98-00,
WRANGLER 98-00.

NOTA:
SI SU PINZA ESTA MAL PUESTA EN TODAS LA OPCIONES EN
LA PANTALLA APARECERA UNA ADVERTENCIA COMO: ERROR, VERIFIQUE CONECXION D
PINZA Y VUELVA A CONECTAR SU PINZA PERO EN ESTA OCASIN BIEN PUESTA.
EL EURO LECTOR II NO PUEDE DAAR LOS DATOS DE LA MEMORIA, ESTA SOLO LE
SUMINISTRA UN VOLTAJE DE 6v A 300mA Y CONTIENE UN REGULADOR QUE SOLO
TRABAJA CON ESTE VOLTAJE. COMO INFORMACION LA MEMORIA SOLO SE MODIFICA
CON UN VOLTAJE DE 12v DIRECTA.
EL EURO LECTOR II SOLO ESTA DISEADO PARA LOS VOLTAJES INDICADOS SI EL USUARIO
LOS ACCEDE CUALQUIER DAO EN EL EQUIPO SERA POR CUENTA Y RIESGO DEL USUARIO.

BOTON 1
SELECCIONAR

BOTON 2
ACEPTA

CONECTOR
A
PINZA

ALIMENTACION
7.5VDC 300mA
(NO IMPORTA LA POLARIDAD)

INTERRUPTOR

LUIS PEREZ VERDIA 6-A COL. DE LOS MAESTROS


C.P. 45150 ZAPOPAN JALISCO TALLER. (33) 3126 1761
NEXTEL. (33) 3849 2750 ID. 162609*1
juliovil7@hotmail.com
www.cerrajeria.com.mx

Printed with ImmoKille


0x000:
0x010:
0x020:
0x030:
0x040:
0x050:
0x060:
0x070:
0x080:
0x090:
0x0A0:
0x0B0:
0x0C0:
0x0D0:
0x0E0:
0x0F0:
0x100:
0x110:
0x120:
0x130:
0x140:
0x150:
0x160:
0x170:
0x180:
0x190:
0x1A0:
0x1B0:
0x1C0:
0x1D0:
0x1E0:
0x1F0:

12
05
05
04
04
07
00
05
05
00
00
05
05
34
34
57
57
00
FF
FF
01
01
FF
00
65
00
00
00
00
00
01
01

68
01
01
01
01
02
00
04
04
80
80
07
07
39
39
5A
5A
00
FF
FF
01
07
FF
00
65
00
00
00
00
00
02
02

30
02
02
80
80
8A
77
00
00
80
80
83
83
4D
4D
37
37
AE
FF
FF
48
43
FF
43
03
03
00
00
00
00
00
00

17
00
00
1E
1E
02
0D
00
00
80
80
2B
2B
39
39
5A
5A
0A
FF
FF
61
22
00
22
88
44
00
00
00
00
00
00

60
1E
1E
34
34
D9
22
42
42
80
80
11
11
32
32
30
30
93
FF
FF
72
7B
00
7C
BA
32
00
00
00
00
00
00

FE
40
40
28
28
01
0E
00
00
00
00
33
33
4D
4D
41
41
0E
FF
FF
64
00
00
00
02
01
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
AA
AA
0B
00
00
00
00
00
56
56
31
31
34
34
00
FF
FF
77
6D
00
65
08
0F
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
B8
B8
00
00
04
04
80
80
57
57
31
31
32
32
00
FF
FF
61
04
00
04
00
04
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
45
45
18
3F
00
00
00
00
52
52
32
32
32
32
00
FF
FF
72
04
00
03
03
43
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
5B
5B
04
03
00
00
80
80
56
56
31
31
38
38
00
FF
FF
65
FF
00
44
88
22
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
69
69
90
90
C3
00
01
01
80
80
03
03
39
39
38
38
00
FF
FF
20
00
00
A6
40
7B
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
C1
C1
00
00
0E
00
00
00
FF
FF
00
00
38
38
33
33
00
FF
FF
4E
00
00
00
02
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
03
03
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
56
56
30
30
00
FF
FF
6F
80
00
31
0B
6D
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
A5
A5
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
03
03
03
03
00
FF
FF
00
7F
00
0F
00
04
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
CA
C9
69
68
8D
04
A9
A9
78
78
9F
9F
F2
F2
D0
D0
11
FF
FF
DF
90
ED
72
F7
09
E6
E5
E4
E3
DF
DF

5A
FD
FD
FC
FC
FD
FF
FF
FF
FB
FB
FD
FD
FC
FC
FC
FC
11
FF
FF
FB
FC
FC
FD
FC
FE
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF

.h0.`Z
.....@....i.
.....@....i.
...4(E[ ...i
...4(E[ ...h
...........
..w."...?......
....B.........
....B.........
......x
......x
..+.3VWRV....
..+.3VWRV....
49M92M112198V.
49M92M112198V.
WZ7Z0A4228830.
WZ7Z0A4228830.
..............

..Hardware No.
..C"{.m....
...........
..C"|.e..D.1.r
ee.....@...
...D2...C"{.m..
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............

Printed with ImmoKille


0x000:
0x010:
0x020:
0x030:
0x040:
0x050:
0x060:
0x070:
0x080:
0x090:
0x0A0:
0x0B0:
0x0C0:
0x0D0:
0x0E0:
0x0F0:
0x100:
0x110:
0x120:
0x130:
0x140:
0x150:
0x160:
0x170:
0x180:
0x190:
0x1A0:
0x1B0:
0x1C0:
0x1D0:
0x1E0:
0x1F0:

12
05
05
04
04
07
00
05
05
00
00
05
05
34
34
57
57
00
FF
FF
01
01
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
01
01

68
01
01
01
01
02
00
04
04
80
80
07
07
39
39
5A
5A
00
FF
FF
01
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
02
02

30
01
01
80
80
8A
77
00
00
80
80
83
83
4D
4D
37
37
0F
FF
FF
48
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

17
00
00
1E
1E
02
0D
00
00
80
80
2B
2B
39
39
5A
5A
1B
FF
FF
61
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

60
1E
1E
34
34
D9
22
42
42
80
80
11
11
32
32
30
30
66
FF
FF
72
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FE
40
40
28
28
01
0E
00
00
00
00
33
33
4D
4D
41
41
F9
FF
FF
64
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
AA
AA
0B
00
00
00
00
00
56
56
31
31
34
34
00
FF
FF
77
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
B8
B8
00
00
04
04
80
80
57
57
31
31
32
32
00
FF
FF
61
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
45
45
18
3F
00
00
00
00
52
52
32
32
32
32
00
FF
FF
72
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
5B
5B
04
03
00
00
80
80
56
56
31
31
38
38
00
FF
FF
65
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
69
69
90
90
C3
00
01
01
80
80
03
03
39
39
38
38
00
FF
FF
20
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
C1
C1
00
00
0E
00
00
00
FF
FF
00
00
38
38
33
33
00
FF
FF
4E
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
00
00
03
03
07
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
56
56
30
30
00
FF
FF
6F
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
A5
A5
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
03
03
03
03
00
FF
FF
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00

FF
CB
CA
69
68
8D
04
A9
A9
78
78
9F
9F
F2
F2
D0
D0
11
FF
FF
DF
E3
EA
E9
E8
E7
E6
E5
E4
E3
DF
DF

5A
FD
FD
FC
FC
FD
FF
FF
FF
FB
FB
FD
FD
FC
FC
FC
FC
11
FF
FF
FB
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF

.h0.`Z
.....@....i.
.....@....i.
...4(E[ ...i
...4(E[ ...h
...........
..w."...?......
....B.........
....B.........
......x
......x
..+.3VWRV....
..+.3VWRV....
49M92M112198V.
49M92M112198V.
WZ7Z0A4228830.
WZ7Z0A4228830.
....f..........

..Hardware No.
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............
..............